Document the new BUFFER arg to the `shell' command.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
1e7db2e9 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2001-03-15
75d80cc6 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1 7
05197f40 8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
889be0a1
DL
11See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and
12fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra
13charsets in this release.
14
f4988be7
GM
15** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
16
424d8b44
DL
17** Support for LynxOS has been added.
18
1fa28578
GM
19** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
20the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
21
22** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
23images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
24to list them.
6344985d 25
d5483ab1 26** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 27Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
28
29** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
30Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
31
32** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
60dd7e0e 33support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the
8628686a
DL
34maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to
35build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any
36necessary changes to unexec.
f4988be7 37
d9c9b920
DL
38** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the
39new display features described below.
40
e90813b8 41** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement
a7c13351 42all of the new display features described below. The port currently
d69aa2e3
EZ
43lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the
44"Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the
45description of aspects specific to the Mac.
d9c9b920 46
05197f40 47\f
1fa28578
GM
48* Changes in Emacs 21.1
49
1e7db2e9
GM
50** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
51
52The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
53Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
54oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
55of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
56the text.
57
58** Emacs has a new face implementation.
59
60The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
61font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
62height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
63These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
64specify a font.
65
66Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
67These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
68under Lisp changes, below.
69
70** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
71
72Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
73Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
74the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
75italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
76Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
77attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
78on terminals.
79
80The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now
81supported on character terminals.
82
83** New default font is Courier 12pt under X.
84
85+++
86** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
87
88If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
89longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it
90is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum
91minibuffer window size by setting the following variables:
92
93- User option: max-mini-window-height
94
95Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
96fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
97specifies a number of lines.
98
99Default is 0.25.
100
101- User option: resize-mini-windows
102
103How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always
104resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows
105grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk
106again.
107
108Default is `grow-only'.
109
110** LessTif support.
111
112Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see
a04c6760 113<http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92.26, or later.
1e7db2e9
GM
114
115** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
116
117When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
118from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
119non-nil.
120
121** Toolkit scroll bars.
122
123Emacs now uses toolkit scroll bars if available. When configured for
124LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scroll bar. Otherwise, when
125configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
126bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
127bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
128Emacs.
129
130When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
131Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
132Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
133Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
134define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
135`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
136
137Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
138a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
139directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
140different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
141system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
142add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
143
144The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
145`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
146This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
3593c177 147imake configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
1e7db2e9
GM
148Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
149
150+++
151** Automatic Hscrolling
152
153Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
154`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
155customized.
156
157If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or
158scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound
159for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll
160the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more
161to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc.
162
163+++
164** Tool bar support.
165
166Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
167of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level
168changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is
169displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved
170if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome
171icons will be used.
172
173To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons
174for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would
2018166d 175also be useful to touch up some of the PBM icons manually.
1e7db2e9
GM
176
177+++
178** Tooltips.
179
180Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
181mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can
182turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
183
184Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
185variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
186the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
187tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
188
189+++
190** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
191of its own. By default, when a window is selected, the cursor is
192solid; otherwise, it is hollow. The user-option
ab9c49cf 193`cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to display the
1e7db2e9 194cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is shown, if
2018166d 195non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown.
1e7db2e9
GM
196
197** Fringes to the left and right of windows are used to display
198truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
199foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
200customizing face `fringe'.
201
202** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default.
203You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'.
204In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D
205appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line
206occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of
207the window to be partially obscured.)
208
209The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older
210versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, now defaults to nil,
211and its use is deprecated.
212
213+++
214** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
215
6b9572dc
EZ
216Different parts of the mode line have been made mouse-sensitive on all
217systems which support the mouse. Moving the mouse to a
218mouse-sensitive part in the mode line changes the appearance of the
219mouse pointer to an arrow, and help about available mouse actions is
220displayed either in the echo area, or in the tooltip window if you
221have enabled one.
1e7db2e9
GM
222
223Currently, the following actions have been defined:
224
225- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
226buffers.
227
228- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
229M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
230
231- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
232
233- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
234`*') toggles the status.
235
236- Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu.
237
238+++
239** Hourglass pointer
240
241Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can
242turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
243
244+++
245** Blinking cursor
246
247M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
248terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
249and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
250the group `cursor'.
251
252+++
253** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
254
255This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
256generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
257See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
258details.
259
260Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
261have to do anything to activate it.
262
263+++
264** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been
265changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a
266buffer by default.
267
268** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the
269current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the
270beginning and end of the buffer.
271
272** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the
273recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is
274signaled.
275
276** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
277file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
278
279+++
280** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
281compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
282this behavior.
283
284The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
285compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
286Emacs dump core.
287
288** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
289
290When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
291widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
292Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
293
294** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
295more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
296now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
297
298** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
299using that menu.
300
301+++
302** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
303
304When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
305whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
306defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
307highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
308displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
309whitespace.
310
311+++
312** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
313all frames except the selected one.
314
315** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to
316let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting.
317
318+++
319** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
320MS-DOS version of Emacs.
321
322** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs
323header-line (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window),
324so that it remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled.
325This behavior may be disabled by customizing the option
326`Info-use-header-line'.
327
328+++
329** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor
330mode `iswitchb-mode'.
331
332+++
333** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore.
334If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with
335`(msb-mode 1)'.
336
337** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card
338have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex',
339`de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included.
340
341** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available.
342
343** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
344`dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in
345`fr-drdref.tex'.
346
347+++
348** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
349displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
350menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
351menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
352
17851d9d
EZ
353** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable throuh Customize.
354
a19e85cc 355You can no longer use `M-x customize-variable' to customize `load-path'
17851d9d
EZ
356because it now contains a version-dependent component. You can still
357use `add-to-list' and `setq' to customize this variable in your
358`~/.emacs' init file or to modify it from any Lisp program in general.
1e7db2e9 359
21d84d66
EZ
360** The new user-option `normal-erase-is-backspace' can be set to
361determine the effect of the Delete and Backspace function keys.
1e7db2e9
GM
362
363On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen
364according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace
365key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the
366option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to
21d84d66
EZ
367delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward. On
368keyboards which either have only one key (usually labeled DEL), or two
369keys DEL and BS which produce the same effect, the option's value is
370set to nil, and these keys delete backward.
1e7db2e9
GM
371
372If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes
373a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the
374Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via
375`keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on
21d84d66
EZ
376the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting on a text-only
377terminal if you don't have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys.
1e7db2e9 378
21d84d66
EZ
379Programmatically, you can call function normal-erase-is-backspace-mode
380to toggle the behavior of the Delete and Backspace keys.
1e7db2e9
GM
381
382+++
383** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
384point in a pop-up window.
385
386+++
387** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
388under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or
389customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'.
390
391The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount'
392determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
393
394+++
395** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
396sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
397(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
aa082854 398You can customize `auto-save-list-file-prefix' to change this location.
1e7db2e9
GM
399
400+++
401** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
402
403** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
404been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
405
1ff243e2
EZ
406+++
407** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows.
408This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on
409MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made
410before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now.
411
fba448c1
DL
412** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom
413group.
414
75d80cc6 415** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the
a431bf24
GM
416behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. The following values
417are recognized:
418
419`untabify' -- turn a tab to many spaces, then delete one space;
420`hungry' -- delete all whitespace, both tabs and spaces;
421`all' -- delete all whitespace, including tabs, spaces and newlines;
422nil -- just delete one character.
423
b863a173
GM
424Default value is `untabify'.
425
a431bf24 426[This change was made in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.]
75d80cc6 427
8416e94a
DL
428** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face
429symbol, not double-quoted.
430
2a64f8c2 431** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future
8416e94a
DL
432version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline,
433rnews, rnewspost. Their implementations have been moved to
434lisp/obsolete.
2a64f8c2 435
22adbe54
DL
436+++
437** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding
438system for keyboard input.
439
eb1b0c74
GM
440+++
441** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
442to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
443
7495f7ca
EZ
444+++
445** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces Emacs to behave
446as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. This comes handy
447with mice that don't report their number of buttons correctly. One
448example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, but clicks on the
449middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version of Emacs.
450
c607d53d 451** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the
346598f1 452trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add
c607d53d
SS
453this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'.
454
4104194e 455** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will
1e36ff68
DL
456be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is
457non-nil.
4104194e 458
c6f01e00
MB
459** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el.
460To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the
461`auto-compression-mode' command.
462
4c724b32 463** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for
f99d295c
GM
464`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME, and
465`browse-url-kde' can be chosen for invoking the KDE browser.
4c724b32 466
daa66f34
GM
467** The user-option `browse-url-new-window-p' has been renamed to
468`browse-url-new-window-flag'.
469
b856f39c 470+++
068127d6
GM
471** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now
472operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode.
473
8ac08dea 474+++
62c273d7
DL
475** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It
476is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia.
477
8ac08dea 478+++
f393cf90
DL
479** Gnus changes.
480
481The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in
482four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment,
483internationalization and mail-fetching.
484
485*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the
486many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone.
487
488If you used procmail like in
489
490(setq nnmail-use-procmail t)
491(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail)
492(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/")
493(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in")
494
327652be 495this now has changed to
f393cf90
DL
496
497(setq mail-sources
498 '((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/"
499 :suffix ".in")))
500
501More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods ->
502Getting Mail -> Mail Sources
503
504*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of
505Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details.
31446945
KH
506Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no
507longer work; remove them and use the native facilities.
508
657706fa
DL
509The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to
510use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was
511installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier.
f393cf90 512
60dd7e0e 513*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many
4301cf66
DL
514parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There
515are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is
516now just a compatibility layer.
f393cf90
DL
517
518*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be
519called to position point.
520
521*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in
522summary buffers and NOV files.
523
524*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number
525of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added.
526
527*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a
528subtly different manner.
529
530*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive
531and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with
532ever-changing layouts.
533
534*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap.
535
72190b84 536*** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support.
f393cf90 537
889be0a1 538+++
f393cf90 539** When your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO
d1e68bce
DL
5408859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display
541more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of
542empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a
543window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this
544on.
545
ba9eeda1
GM
546** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be
547set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a
548file that is already visited under a different name.
549
42ac0ae5
GM
550** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to
551nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size.
552
ba9eeda1 553** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM
dab96841
DL
554support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode,
555use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the
556buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands
557M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a
558new command M-x strokes-list-strokes.
559
b941a14b 560+++
ba9eeda1 561** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name
eb27839a 562and displays information about that.
b941a14b 563
25ad1371
GM
564** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
565expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
566
567This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
568determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
569mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
570interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
571regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
572associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
573
40e857ea 574** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 575suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 576
beb2eb00 577+++
c08398de
DL
578** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
579buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
580contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
581by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
582insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
583the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
584Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
585
db7a3ede 586+++
3d6cd763
GM
587** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
588coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
589escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
590such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
591recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 592always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 593read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
594(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
595RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 596
0b8a3a6d
DL
597** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
598environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
599
6d35b49f 600+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
601** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
602displays all characters in that character set.
603
604** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
605coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
606
a4067978 607+++
5cb6a58e 608** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978 609on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
a5e350c9
SM
610defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region
611commenting with the variable `comment-style'.
5cb6a58e 612
424d8b44 613+++
5898e075
DL
614** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
615`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
616indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
617indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
618
424d8b44 619+++
cc181e95
GM
620** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
621on the display using several methods
622
424d8b44 623+++
cc181e95
GM
624- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
625a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
626be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
627
424d8b44 628+++
cc181e95 629- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
5820dead 630equivalent to specifying the frame parameter.
cc181e95 631
da4496b6 632- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
633
634- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
635the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
636
424d8b44 637+++
3b4fa1b2 638** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 639an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 640command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 641does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 642
424d8b44 643+++
176256a1 644** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
645`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
646typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 647
dd0add8e
DL
648** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
649characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
650
424d8b44 651+++
699238d9 652** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 653
7233c5bd
GM
654*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
655whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
656is useful for debugging X problems.
657
658Example:
659
699238d9 660 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 661
100b3cbb
GM
662*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
663visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
664the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
665and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
666visual class names are
667
668 TrueColor
669 PseudoColor
670 DirectColor
671 StaticColor
672 GrayScale
673 StaticGray
674
675Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
676`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
677meaning.
678
679The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
680supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
681`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
682visual.
683
684Example:
685
699238d9 686 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
687
688*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
689specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
690default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
691resource values are `true' or `on'.
692
693Example:
694
699238d9 695 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 696
424d8b44 697+++
31047e0d
DL
698** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
699
3261c1d8
DL
700** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
701to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
702
ffe36136 703** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
704the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
705MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
706displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
707
559cee90
DL
708** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
709read mail from the menu etc.
710
480b5773 711+++
271b4185
GM
712** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
713a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
714
0daee095
GM
715** Changes in Texinfo mode.
716
a5e350c9 717*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
0daee095
GM
718macros
719
720 Key binding Macro
721 -------------------------
722 C-c C-c C-s @strong
723 C-c C-c C-e @emph
105602b1 724 C-c C-c u @uref
0daee095 725 C-c C-c q @quotation
105602b1 726 C-c C-c m @email
a5e350c9
SM
727 C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block>
728 M-RET @item
729
730*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context.
0daee095 731
559cee90
DL
732** Changes in Outline mode.
733
734There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
735`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
736the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
737
327652be 738** Changes to Emacs Server
7a912f63 739
c0a8c108
EZ
740+++
741*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
742with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
743are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
744Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
745buffers to kill, as before.
746
747Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 748i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
749this way.
750
956777b3
GM
751** Changes to Show Paren mode.
752
753*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
754The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
755use. Default is 1000.
756
f6989277 757+++
404fa7d6
DL
758** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
759groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
760
424d8b44
DL
761+++
762** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
763M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
764M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
765buffers.
8964fec7 766
d35fce81
GM
767** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
768abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
769`directory-abbrev-alist'.
770
a933dad1
DL
771** Faces and frame parameters.
772
773There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
774Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
775`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
776`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
777sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
778for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
779parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
780
781Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
782`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 783`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
784`default' face and vice versa.
785
d80061fa 786+++
f77a4a8a
GM
787** New face `menu'.
788
789The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
f77a4a8a 790
424d8b44 791+++
a933dad1
DL
792** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
793
794The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
795colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
796correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
797the screen gamma of a frame's display.
798
799PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
800in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
801color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
802
803The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
804`ScreenGamma'.
805
a933dad1
DL
806** Tabs and variable-width text.
807
808Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
809defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
810independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
811Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
812
813** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
814
424d8b44 815+++
a933dad1
DL
816*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
817
818 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
819
79dd1637
RS
820The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
821LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 822
79dd1637
RS
823*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
824LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 825
a933dad1
DL
826** Sound support
827
2f516940 828Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 829driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 830supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 831
424d8b44 832+++
a933dad1
DL
833** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
834the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
835forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
836value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
837users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
838even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
839
840The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
841
0e18b431 842+++
a933dad1
DL
843** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
844
845As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
846drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
847`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
848
fdd8bb68 849+++
a933dad1
DL
850** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
851bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
852
853This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
854`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
855variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
856
c5d00c64 857+++
a933dad1
DL
858** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
859
860When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
d9e66103 861value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a
a933dad1 862number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 863fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
a933dad1
DL
864
865When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
8a33023e 866value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a
a933dad1 867number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
d5951185 868fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
a933dad1
DL
869
870** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
871notably at the end of lines.
872
873All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
874spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
875
424d8b44 876+++
8748ecc0 877** The function `replace-rectangle' is an alias for `string-rectangle'.
eee54b0e 878
8748ecc0
GM
879** The new command M-x string-insert-rectangle is like `string-rectangle',
880but inserts text instead of replacing it.
2ce72bfa 881
a933dad1
DL
882** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
883query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
884after each match to get the replacement text.
885
00782214 886+++
d5483ab1
GM
887** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
888you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 889
424d8b44 890** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
891you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
892lisp-complete-symbol.
893
2f72fd2f
GM
894** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
895
0d43b60d
GM
896** Changes to hideshow.el
897
0d43b60d
GM
898*** Generalized block selection and traversal
899
889be0a1
DL
900A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings),
901and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp
902serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate.
903See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'.
904
905*** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active,
906hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can
907be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of
908the open block.
909
910*** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a
911function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of
912the normal block-hiding function.
913
914*** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed.
915
916*** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions,
ed368846
TTN
917roughly imitating those of Outline minor mode. Notably, the prefix
918for all bindings is now `C-c @'. For details, see the documentation
919for `hs-minor-mode'.
327652be 920
a32da22c
EZ
921*** The variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' has been removed, and
922hideshow.el now always behaves as if this variable were set to t.
923
559cee90
DL
924** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
925
424d8b44 926+++
1b24b888
GM
927*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes
928an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
559cee90
DL
929log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
930
424d8b44 931+++
1b24b888
GM
932**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the
933current buffer.
424d8b44
DL
934
935+++
1b24b888
GM
936*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries
937in a log file.
eb2aac9d 938
502004be 939+++
1b24b888
GM
940*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log
941entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
2018166d 942Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
424d8b44 943version number is performed based on regular expressions from
8a33023e 944`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized.
424d8b44 945Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 946
2c63c979 947*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting.
1b24b888 948
79c78e77
GM
949** Changes to cmuscheme
950
951*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed
952`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el.
953
3476b54a
GM
954** Changes in Font Lock
955
956*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
a5e350c9 957font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode.
3476b54a 958
8a33023e 959*** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should
2be6ecc6 960set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults.
2c63c979 961
a5e350c9
SM
962*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose
963the face used for each string/comment.
c607d53d 964
601e0081
SM
965*** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'.
966Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code".
967
c2c6918d
MB
968** Changes to Shell mode
969
970*** The `shell' command now accepts an optional argument to specify the buffer
971to use, which defaults to "*shell*". When used interactively, a
972non-default buffer may be specified by giving the `shell' command a
973prefix argument (causing it to prompt for the buffer name).
974
b3b98592
GM
975** Comint (subshell) changes
976
988cded7
MB
977These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which
978include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc.
979
9ab47964
MB
980*** Comint now by default interprets some carriage-control characters.
981Comint now removes CRs from CR LF sequences, and treats single CRs and
982BSs in the output in a way similar to a terminal (by deleting to the
983beginning of the line, or deleting the previous character,
984respectively). This is achieved by adding `comint-carriage-motion' to
985the `comint-output-filter-functions' hook by default.
c825bc66 986
988cded7
MB
987*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp'
988to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which
989parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the
990user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use
991this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line,
992respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this
993feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option
994`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'.
995
996*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
b3b98592
GM
997and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
998
988cded7 999*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
b3b98592
GM
1000buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
1001buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
1002
1003The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
1004M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
1005the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
1006
988cded7
MB
1007*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts,
1008and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features,
1009see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 1010
988cded7 1011*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s')
d648cc45
MB
1012saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix
1013argument, it appends to the file.
1014
988cded7 1015*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output'
d648cc45
MB
1016(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for
1017compatibility.
1018
0e40b809
EL
1019*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input
1020ring (history).
d648cc45 1021
fe5d5d8c 1022*** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for
6dde6abc
GM
1023identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp
1024strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#".
fe5d5d8c 1025
e26cec67
GM
1026** Changes to Rmail mode
1027
b97cd2cc 1028*** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
f3780fe4 1029set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when
c0510d27
GM
1030receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
1031recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
1032`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
1033as correspondent.
1034
1035Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
1036mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 1037regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 1038
3b55acc9
GM
1039*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
1040to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
1041Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
1042with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
1043for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
1044
6a1950ec
GM
1045*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
1046like `j'.
1047
5bb6f079
RS
1048*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
1049specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 1050digest message.
e26cec67 1051
993d8b7d
DL
1052*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
1053in which folder to put messages automatically.
1054
4ddb57b2
EZ
1055*** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message
1056with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly
1057due to missing or malformed "charset=" header.
1058
400a1ed0
GM
1059** Changes to TeX mode
1060
a5e350c9 1061*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
400a1ed0
GM
1062`latex-mode'.
1063
a5e350c9
SM
1064*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm.
1065
1066*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs.
1067
1068*** Added support for outline-minor-mode.
c607d53d 1069
a933dad1
DL
1070** Changes to RefTeX mode
1071
1072*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
1073 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
1074 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
1075 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
1076 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
1077 can be edited from that buffer.
1078
1079*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
1080 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
1081 `A' to use all marked entries).
1082
1083*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
1084 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
1085
1086*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
1087 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
1088 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
1089 been cited.
1090
38de9631
GM
1091** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
1092The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
1093semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
1094in column 1 are always made leaves.
1095
a933dad1
DL
1096** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
1097has the following new features:
1098
1099*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
1100may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
1101to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
1102time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
1103
1104*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
1105feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
1106file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
1107compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
1108pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
1109defaults to 1.
1110
5d94f558 1111** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
1112file names.
1113
424d8b44 1114+++
a933dad1
DL
1115** Customize changes
1116
1117*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
2018166d
DL
1118`State' menu to add comments, or give a prefix argument to
1119M-x customize-set-variable or M-x customize-set-value. Note that
1120customization comments will cause the customizations to fail in
1121earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
1122
1123*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
1124Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
1125default).
1126
d2b747a8
EZ
1127*** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it
1128does not allow you to save customizations in your `~/.emacs' init
1129file. This is because saving customizations from such a session would
1130wipe out all the other customizationss you might have on your init
1131file.
1132
a933dad1
DL
1133** New features in evaluation commands
1134
5e03eb84 1135*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
1136modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
1137print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
1138customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
1139eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
1140
5e03eb84
GM
1141*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
1142code when called with a prefix argument.
1143
ead53494
GM
1144** Ispell changes
1145
37d8a691 1146+++
bbe15990
EZ
1147*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
1148transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
1149spell-checks the current buffer.
1150
37d8a691 1151+++
385ff9e3
GM
1152*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
1153added.
1154
1155*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
1156correction is made and re-checked.
1157
1e7db2e9 1158*** An Italian, Portuguese, and Slovak dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
1159
1160*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
1161cases.
1162
1163*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
1164on syntax errors.
1165
1166*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
1167end of the buffer.
1168
a933dad1
DL
1169** Dired changes
1170
1171*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
1172command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
1173is, delete only empty directories.
1174
1175*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
1176command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
1177copy directories recursively.
1178
f6737cde
GM
1179*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
1180in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
1181the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
1182
2f72fd2f
GM
1183*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
1184replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
1185directory.
1186
7381ae05
MB
1187*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
1188a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
1189This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
1190will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
1191accurate or inaccurate as it is.
1192
e024b101
GM
1193*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
1194from ls switches.
1195
60b392a7
MB
1196*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use
1197of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename,
1198which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single
1199source file, not when operating on multiple marked files.
1200
a933dad1
DL
1201** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
1202use the -f option when sending mail.
1203
b1c609b1
GM
1204** CC mode changes.
1205
1206Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
1207current user setups (although it's believed that these
1208incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
1209However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
1210back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
1211compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
1212release.
1213
e120bebf
GM
1214*** The hardcoded switch to "java" style in Java mode is gone.
1215CC Mode used to automatically set the style to "java" when Java mode
1216is entered. This has now been removed since it caused too much
1217confusion.
1218
1219However, to keep backward compatibility to a certain extent, the
1220default value for c-default-style now specifies the "java" style for
1221java-mode, but "gnu" for all other modes (as before). So you won't
1222notice the change if you haven't touched that variable.
1223
1224*** New cleanups, space-before-funcall and compact-empty-funcall.
1225Two new cleanups have been added to c-cleanup-list:
1226
1227space-before-funcall causes a space to be inserted before the opening
1228parenthesis of a function call, which gives the style "foo (bar)".
1229
1230compact-empty-funcall causes any space before a function call opening
1231parenthesis to be removed if there are no arguments to the function.
1232It's typically useful together with space-before-funcall to get the
1233style "foo (bar)" and "foo()".
1234
1235*** Some keywords now automatically trigger reindentation.
1236Keywords like "else", "while", "catch" and "finally" have been made
1237"electric" to make them reindent automatically when they continue an
1238earlier statement. An example:
1239
1240for (i = 0; i < 17; i++)
1241 if (a[i])
1242 res += a[i]->offset;
1243else
1244
1245Here, the "else" should be indented like the preceding "if", since it
1246continues that statement. CC Mode will automatically reindent it after
1247the "else" has been typed in full, since it's not until then it's
1248possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a continuation of
1249the preceding "if".
1250
1251CC Mode uses Abbrev mode to achieve this, which is therefore turned on
1252by default.
1253
1254*** M-a and M-e now moves by sentence in multiline strings.
1255Previously these two keys only moved by sentence in comments, which
1256meant that sentence movement didn't work in strings containing
1257documentation or other natural language text.
1258
1259The reason it's only activated in multiline strings (i.e. strings that
1260contain a newline, even when escaped by a '\') is to avoid stopping in
1261the short strings that often reside inside statements. Multiline
1262strings almost always contain text in a natural language, as opposed
1263to other strings that typically contain format specifications,
1264commands, etc. Also, it's not that bothersome that M-a and M-e misses
1265sentences in single line strings, since they're short anyway.
1266
1267*** Support for autodoc comments in Pike mode.
1268Autodoc comments for Pike are used to extract documentation from the
1269source, like Javadoc in Java. Pike mode now recognize this markup in
1270comment prefixes and paragraph starts.
1271
1272*** The comment prefix regexps on c-comment-prefix may be mode specific.
1273When c-comment-prefix is an association list, it specifies the comment
1274line prefix on a per-mode basis, like c-default-style does. This
1275change came about to support the special autodoc comment prefix in
1276Pike mode only.
1277
1278*** Better handling of syntactic errors.
1279The recovery after unbalanced parens earlier in the buffer has been
1280improved; CC Mode now reports them by dinging and giving a message
1281stating the offending line, but still recovers and indent the
1282following lines in a sane way (most of the time). An "else" with no
1283matching "if" is handled similarly. If an error is discovered while
1284indenting a region, the whole region is still indented and the error
1285is reported afterwards.
1286
1287*** Lineup functions may now return absolute columns.
1288A lineup function can give an absolute column to indent the line to by
1289returning a vector with the desired column as the first element.
1290
1291*** More robust and warning-free byte compilation.
1292Although this is strictly not a user visible change (well, depending
1293on the view of a user), it's still worth mentioning that CC Mode now
1294can be compiled in the standard ways without causing trouble. Some
1295code have also been moved between the subpackages to enhance the
1296modularity somewhat. Thanks to Martin Buchholz for doing the
1297groundwork.
1298
7972fcfc
GM
1299*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
1300This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
1301of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
1302non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
1303want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
1304have to bother.
1305
1306Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
1307situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 1308and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
1309If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
1310the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
1311by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
1312
b1c609b1
GM
1313*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
1314When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
1315variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
1316take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
1317is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
1318settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
1319possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
1320Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
1321
1322By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
1323special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
1324the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
1325of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
1326above.
1327
1328Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
1329when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
1330function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
1331call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
1332then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
1333values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
1334only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
1335function documentation for more info.
1336
1337The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
1338especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
1339with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
1340intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
1341such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
1342is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
1343configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
1344global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
1345
1346(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
1347
1348**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
1349This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
1350
1351This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
1352variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
1353completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
1354the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
1355empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
1356style system.
1357
1358**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
1359In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
1360c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
1361as far as possible.
1362
1363*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
1364CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
1365surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
1366chapter about this in the manual.
1367
1368**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
1369The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
1370recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
1371primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
1372adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
1373
1374**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
1375This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
1376c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
1377
1378**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
1379This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
1380
1381It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
1382Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
1383A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
1384inside CC Mode.
1385
1386Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
1387causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
1388the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
1389available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
1390cc-mode/).
1391
1392**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
1393The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
1394specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
1395literals.
1396
1397**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
1398It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
1399prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
1400you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
1401this function.
1402
1403*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1404It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1405to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1406struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1407Thanks to Eric Eide.
1408
1409*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1410It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1411opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1412
1413**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1414
1415*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1416See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1417better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1418and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1419
1420*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1421previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1422the column specified by comment-column.
1423
1424*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1425In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1426is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1427prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1428contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1429don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1430
1431*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1432instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1433arguments.
1434
1435*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1436
1437*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1438c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1439c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1440variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1441Provan).
1442
1443*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1444
c407c570
GM
1445** Makefile mode changes
1446
1447*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1448
5d94f558 1449*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1450Fontlock mode is active.
1451
87be76f6
GM
1452** Isearch changes
1453
3353ef5a
GM
1454*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1455so that searches can be resumed.
1456
1457*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1458respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1459that started the search.
1460
87be76f6 1461*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1462selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1463
c8a8458a 1464+++
87be76f6
GM
1465*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1466
d35fce81 1467Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1468`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1469search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1470before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1471highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1472`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1473
1474The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1475will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1476Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1477using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1478usual snappy response.
1479
1480If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1481matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1482set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1483isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1484
21bc6203 1485+++
35384f06
GM
1486** Changes in sort.el
1487
1488The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1489as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
21bc6203 1490new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default
35384f06 1491numeric base.
87be76f6 1492
d7b511c4
GM
1493** Changes to Ange-ftp
1494
424d8b44 1495+++
d7b511c4 1496*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1497names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1498sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1499
d7b511c4
GM
1500*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1501ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1502
9d453139
SS
1503*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1504output ^M at the end of lines.
1505
4b9347b3
GM
1506** Shell script mode changes.
1507
1508Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
8a33023e 1509derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and
4b9347b3
GM
1510sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1511
79214ddf
FP
1512** Etags changes.
1513
1514*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1515
aca0be23 1516*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1517possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1518{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1519This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1520a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1521
79214ddf
FP
1522*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1523declarations when given the --declarations option.
1524
1525*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1526"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf 1527
8c463abe 1528*** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags
10de1e33
FP
1529automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or
1530`template' keywords.
8c463abe
FP
1531
1532*** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in
1533C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels.
1534
79214ddf
FP
1535*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1536types.
1537
de370c4c 1538*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1539
1540*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1541
1542*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1543are now tagged.
1544
89d57763
FP
1545*** In makefiles, tags the targets.
1546
79214ddf
FP
1547*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1548variables are tagged.
1549
1550*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1551
8dc78b52
FP
1552*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1553for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1554
c8d94f86 1555+++
f6737cde
GM
1556** Changes in etags.el
1557
3f6e4b8b
GM
1558*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1559tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1560is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1561
f6737cde
GM
1562*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1563the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1564
1565If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1566FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1567TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1568obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1569
1570TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1571
1572FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1573List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1574
1575A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1576
1577 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1578 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1579 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1580
1581*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1582of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1583
1584*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1585names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1586
0c68ce6f
GM
1587*** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself.
1588If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c
1589/tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c",
d521e087 1590"dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the file name,
0c68ce6f
GM
1591point will go to the beginning of the file.
1592
1e7db2e9 1593*** Compressed files are now transparently supported if
d521e087
FP
1594auto-compression-mode is active. You can tag (with Etags) and search
1595(with find-tag) both compressed and uncompressed files.
1596
1e7db2e9
GM
1597*** Tags commands like M-x tags-search no longer change point
1598in buffers where no match is found. In buffers where a match is
1599found, the original value of point is pushed on the marker ring.
1600
424d8b44 1601+++
fbc164de
PE
1602** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1603and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1604LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1605
c3eb1f10 1606+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
1607** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1608Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
16098859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
889be0a1
DL
1610GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have
16118859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts.
028d739a
DL
1612There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only)
1613and Polish `slash'.
59c1bf85 1614
732b9cdd
GM
1615+++
1616** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'.
89d57763 1617These new environments mainly select appropriate translations
732b9cdd
GM
1618of the tutorial.
1619
b8b2ea31
KH
1620** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for
1621function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs
1622Lisp Coding Convention".
1623
1624 new command old-binding
1625 --- ------- -----------
1626 f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5
1627 S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5
1628 C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5
1629
1630 f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged
1631 S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged
1632 C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged
1633
1634 S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3
1635 S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6
1636 S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7
1637 S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8
1638 S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged
1639 C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2
1640
1e406be0
KH
1641** The rule of input method "slovak" is slightly changed. Now the
1642rules for translating "q" and "Q" to "`" (backquote) are deleted, thus
1643typing them inserts "q" and "Q" respectively. Rules for translating
1644"=q", "+q", "=Q", and "+Q" to "`" are also deleted. Now, to input
1645"`", you must type "=q".
1646
424d8b44 1647+++
163ea954 1648** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1649remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1650appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1651
1652** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1653
424d8b44 1654+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1655** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1656
6ab8d72d 1657+++
1e36ff68 1658** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps'
c0510d27
GM
1659containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1660expression from that list, are not checked.
1661
5d94f558
SS
1662** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1663When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1664and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1665the buffer, just like for the local files.
1666
dc28878c
GM
1667** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1668
df8a9f78 1669+++
95931eb1
GM
1670** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now
1671displays local abbrevs, only.
1672
54baed30
GM
1673** VC Changes
1674
1675VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it
1676easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp
1677Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism
1678to enable and disable support for particular version systems has
1679changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable
60a441a5 1680`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify
54baed30
GM
1681version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file,
1682each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the
1683file is registered in that backend.
1684
1685When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed
1686backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the
1687directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for
1688master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then
1689the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen.
1690As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete.
1691
1692The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC
1693still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for
1694RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables
1695vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS
1696where it doesn't make sense.)
1697
1698The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also
1699obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude
1700`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now.
1701
1702*** General Changes
1703
1704The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding
1705checks are always done now.
1706
327652be 1707VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control
54baed30
GM
1708operations.
1709
c286608e
SM
1710`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'.
1711`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'.
1712`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'.
1713
22933be8
AS
1714The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the
1715first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the
1716current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into
1717the working file (``merge news'').
1718
1719The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1720(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work
1721downwards.
1722
1723*** Multiple Backends
1724
1725VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is
1726useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS
1727repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally
1728commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your
1729local RCS archives.
1730
1731To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example)
1732should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote''
1733backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of
1734`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.)
1735
60a441a5
AS
1736You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing
1737C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as
1738a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend
1739if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the
1740current revision number from the more remote backend.
22933be8
AS
1741
1742If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to
1743another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change
1744any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to
1745pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally.
1746
1747After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your
1748changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the
1749local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry
1750buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file.
1751
54baed30
GM
1752*** Changes for CVS
1753
1754There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the
1755default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in
1756remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined
1757by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a
1758regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts
1759that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC
1760queries the repository just as often as it does for local files.
1761
22933be8
AS
1762If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of
1763repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and
1764revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without
1765any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version
1766backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version
1767number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~
1768(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter
1769of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other,
1770the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted
105602b1
EZ
1771automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS,
1772since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file
1773name.)
22933be8 1774
54baed30
GM
1775If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the
1776repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit.
1777If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to
22933be8 1778commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the
54baed30
GM
1779current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an
1780entire directory tree.
1781
1782The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call
1783"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option
1784is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are
1785"watched" by other developers.)
1786
22933be8
AS
1787The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r
1788(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give
60a441a5 1789an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update',
22933be8
AS
1790starting at the given directory.
1791
54baed30
GM
1792*** Lisp Changes in VC
1793
1794VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now
1795add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a
1796library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and
1797then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for
60a441a5
AS
1798a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which
1799provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top
54baed30 1800of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library,
60a441a5
AS
1801you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol
1802`SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'.
54baed30 1803
c4ed232b 1804** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT
732b9cdd
GM
1805SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more
1806terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs.
1807See etc/edt-user.doc for more information.
1808
a933dad1
DL
1809** New modes and packages
1810
79b9f6e0
MB
1811*** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode'
1812automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when
1813the default is not applicable.
1814
b95b34e5
GM
1815*** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines,
1816rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The
1817shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \.
1818
1819Features are:
1820
1821- Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is
1822 drawn, like this: | \ /
c607d53d 1823 --+-- X
b95b34e5
GM
1824 | / \
1825
1826- Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the
1827 result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If
1828 your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a
1829 pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will
1830 then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line
1831 you are drawing.
1832
1833- Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight)
1834 poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >.
1835
1836- Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by
1837 flood-filling.
1838
1839- Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular
1840 regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be
1841 turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in
1842 artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa.
c607d53d 1843
b95b34e5
GM
1844- Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can
1845 also do without the mouse.
1846
1847- Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to
1848 reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares
1849 and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your
1850 ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio,
1851 the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round.
1852
1853- Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented:
1854
1855 lines straight-lines
1856 rectangles squares
1857 poly-lines straight poly-lines
1858 ellipses circles
1859 text (see-thru) text (overwrite)
1860 spray-can setting size for spraying
1861 vaporize line vaporize lines
1862 erase characters erase rectangles
1863
1864 Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or
1865 diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in
1866 the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while
1867 drawing.
1868
1869 It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines
1870 (rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are
1871 straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired
1872 by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>.
1873
1874- Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this
1875 can be turned off).
1876
4473cdd9
JW
1877+++
1878*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell
1879implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it.
1880It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp
1881functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports
1882history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It
1883will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of
1884the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been
1885rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell,
1886all within the scope of your Emacs process.
1887
ff332647 1888+++
90cbf47e
GM
1889*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1890intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1891typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1892on certain projects.
1893
894ca69e 1894+++
baf7eee4
GM
1895*** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches
1896of interactively entered regexps. For example,
abb2db1c 1897
d96d6bb0 1898 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1899
1900will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1901face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1902typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1903Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1904appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1905current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
baf7eee4
GM
1906corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches
1907to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match.
abb2db1c 1908
424d8b44 1909+++
d96d6bb0 1910*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1911Emacs is idle.
1912
b4c3513f
EZ
1913+++
1914*** The new package tildify.el allows to add hard spaces or other text
1915fragments in accordance with the current major mode.
1916
31fc5d15
GM
1917*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1918parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1919
5cb6a58e
SM
1920*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1921package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1922be more robust while offering the same functionality.
601e0081
SM
1923`comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only
1924comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary.
5cb6a58e 1925
424d8b44 1926+++
578979ee
GM
1927*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1928facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1929separate Texinfo file.
1930
424d8b44
DL
1931+++
1932*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1933by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1934provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1935`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
8a33023e 1936enter check-in log messages.
dc1178bf 1937
424d8b44 1938+++
6abca616
EZ
1939*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1940without invoking external programs.
1941
1942The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1943and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1944`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1945is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1946Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1947
1948The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1949page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1950
719e2c6e 1951+++
5e5dff44
GM
1952*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1953authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1954
1955The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1956the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1957the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1958Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1959even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1960single step.
1961
1962On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1963matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1964probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1965contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1966
424d8b44 1967+++
f7136ee8
GM
1968*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1969unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1970actually modifying content of a buffer.
1971
bbd9b566
GM
1972*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1973PostScript.
1974
1975Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1976
1977The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1978
1979 ; comment (until end of line)
1980 A non-terminal
1981 "C" terminal
1982 ?C? special
1983 $A default non-terminal
1984 $"C" default terminal
1985 $?C? default special
1986 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1987 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1988 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1989 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1990 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1991 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1992 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1993 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1994 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1995 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1996 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1997 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1998 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1999 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
2000 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
2001
2002Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
2003
99453a38
GM
2004*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
2005align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
2006determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
2007example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
2008equal signs of assignments.
2009
424d8b44 2010+++
559cee90
DL
2011*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
2012paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
2013
424d8b44 2014+++
6448a6b3
GM
2015*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
2016list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
2018166d 2017buffer menu with this package. See the Custom group `bs'.
6448a6b3 2018
6344985d
GM
2019*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
2020
249652b1
GM
2021*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
2022replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
2023is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
2024and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
2025not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
2026which answers different needs.
2027
424d8b44 2028+++
3476b54a
GM
2029*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
2030suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
2031expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
2032course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
2033reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
2034to be enabled.
2035
424d8b44 2036+++
8964fec7
SM
2037*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
2038containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
2039
424d8b44 2040+++
a933dad1
DL
2041*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
2042
424d8b44 2043+++
a933dad1
DL
2044*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
2045
2046*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
2047
fba448c1 2048Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and
8901d1ac
GM
2049`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will
2050disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to
2051`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This
2052displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground
2053and background colors.
2054
a933dad1
DL
2055*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
2056Pascal) language.
2057
f6499c03 2058+++
a933dad1
DL
2059*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
2060the text at point.
2061
2062*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
2063
424d8b44 2064+++
8d54eb69
DL
2065*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
2066
732b9cdd
GM
2067*** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus
2068whitespace in a file.
a933dad1 2069
ebcfda83
GM
2070*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
2071files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
2072(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
2073interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
2074often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
2075uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
2076codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
2077
2078*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
2079
2080Here is an example of columns:
2081
2082horse apple bus
2083dog pineapple car EXTRA
2084porcupine strawberry airplane
2085
2086Doing the following settings:
2087
2088 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
2089 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
2090 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
2091 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
2092
2093
2094Selecting the lines above and typing:
2095
2096 M-x delimit-columns-region
2097
2098It results:
2099
2100[ horse , apple , bus , ]
2101[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
2102[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
2103
2104delim-col has the following options:
2105
2106 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
2107 before all columns.
2108
2109 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
2110 between each column.
2111
2112 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
2113 after all columns.
2114
2115 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
2116 each column.
2117
2118delim-col has the following commands:
2119
2120 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
2121 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
2122
424d8b44 2123+++
2018166d
DL
2124*** Recentf mode maintains a menu for visiting files that were
2125operated on recently. User option recentf-menu-filter specifies a
2126menu filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the
2127recent file list can be displayed:
f507826c 2128
31fc5d15 2129- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
8a33023e
GM
2130- sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending.
2131- showing paths relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 2132
31fc5d15
GM
2133The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
2134dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 2135
8062f458
DL
2136*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
2137text.
2138
424d8b44 2139+++
36e24b82 2140*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
2141of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
2142specific to Message mode.
2143
424d8b44 2144+++
36e24b82
DL
2145*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
2146viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
2147with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
2148
aaa659ef
DL
2149*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
2150interface to access directory servers using different directory
2151protocols. It has a separate manual.
2152
eee54b0e
DL
2153*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
2154for Autoconf, selected automatically.
2155
424d8b44 2156+++
612839b6
GM
2157*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
2158
5d94f558 2159*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 2160minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 2161
399da7e3
DL
2162*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
2163with the diary features.
2164
6e417ca5
DL
2165*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
2166numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
2167
4a27bdfb
GM
2168*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
2169Fill mode.
2170
60dd7e0e
DL
2171*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in
2172Gnus facilities.
2173
dace60cf
JW
2174*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion
2175facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main
2176difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning
2177they can be profiled, debugged, etc.
a18a342d 2178
965bc065
DL
2179+++
2180** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping
2181paragraphs filled as you modify them.
2182
2183+++
2184** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files
2185to be visited as images.
2186
a933dad1
DL
2187** Withdrawn packages
2188
2189*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
2190functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 2191
3261c1d8
DL
2192*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
2193
2194*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23 2195
05197f40 2196\f
01242779
DL
2197* Incompatible Lisp changes
2198
2199There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and
2200may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference.
3b6936cc 2201See the sections below for details.
01242779 2202
89d57763 2203** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom
9b2a085d 2204`(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties.
3b6936cc 2205Use `copy-sequence' and `set-text-properties'.
01242779
DL
2206
2207** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code
2208which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability)
2209may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from
2210these properties are active.
2211
4dd4cc14 2212** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search
01242779 2213ranges may affect some code.
1c14ba45
DL
2214
2215** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook
2216buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might
2217make a difference to some code.
2218
4dd4cc14
DL
2219** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which
2220operates on the minibuffer.
2221
7c94ccf6
EZ
2222** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
2223cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce
2224different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters
2225(previously, both coding systems would produce the same results).
2226Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate
2227character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading
2228multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE
2229encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program
2230reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte
2231sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as
2232a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in
2233the buffer as multibyte characters.
2234
2235Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal
2236MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only
2237appropriate for reading truly binary files.
2238
7a39158f 2239** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and
3280fbe8
EZ
2240`after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use
2241`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead.
7a39158f
DL
2242
2243** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as
2244long promised.
2245
f34eb373
DL
2246** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of
2247extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new
2248dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than
2249one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard
2250charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes
2251the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule
028d739a
DL
2252encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will
2253probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21.
3478eafc 2254
98384b7b
EZ
2255** The variable `directory-sep-char' is slated for removal.
2256Not really a change (yet), but a projected one that you should be
2257aware of: The variable `directory-sep-char' is deprecated, and should
2258not be used. It was always ignored on GNU/Linux and Unix systems and
2259on MS-DOS, but the MS-Windows port tried to support it by adapting the
2260behavior of certain primitives to the value of this variable. It
2261turned out that such support cannot be reliable, so it was decided to
2262remove this variable in the near future. Lisp programs are well
2263advised not to set it to anything but '/', because any different value
2264will not have any effect when support for this variable is removed.
7cd5f1e7 2265
05197f40 2266\f
ce75fd23
GM
2267* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
2268(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
2269
ed31fabf
GM
2270** The new function `interactive-form' can be used to obtain the
2271interactive form of a function.
2272
2018166d
DL
2273** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
2274between custom options. Example:
2275
2276 (defcustom default-input-method nil
2277 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
2278 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
2279 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
2280 :group 'mule
2281 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
2282 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
2283
2284This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
2285current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
2286first in a custom-set-variables statement.
2287
f3780fe4 2288** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of
a758f97d
GM
2289function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no
2290args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated
2291(signal or normal termination).
2292
023045d6
DL
2293+++
2294** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements
2295from a list are now available without requiring the CL package.
2296
eb1b0c74
GM
2297+++
2298** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil
2299to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights.
2300
52d89894
GM
2301+++
2302** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies
2303alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font.
2304
693c4692 2305** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum".
4301cf66 2306
1c14ba45 2307+++
6bc92b2e
GM
2308** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually
2309deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame
2310being deleted.
2311
1c14ba45 2312+++
39e776cd
SM
2313** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg.
2314
a18a342d 2315+++
1396138a 2316** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed.
a18a342d
DL
2317If a range in a regular expression or the arg of
2318skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends
2319with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is
2320C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's
2321charset.
2322
4fbdfdcf
MB
2323+++
2324** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in
2325the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the
2326message.
2327
6a0b0752
MB
2328** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an
2329expression with auto-compression-mode enabled.
2330
1c14ba45 2331+++
47e351a3
GM
2332** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced
2333with the more general `:mask' property.
2334
1c14ba45 2335+++
f864120f 2336** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's.
ba9eeda1 2337
a2bd77b8
GM
2338** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a
2339backslash.
2340
424d8b44
DL
2341+++
2342** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
2343is running in batch mode. For example,
2344
2345 (message "%s" (read t))
2346
2347will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
2348to standard output.
2349
2350+++
2351** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
2352`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
2353
ead53494
GM
2354** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
2355will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
2356frame or window.
2357
f6499c03 2358+++
27848c01
GM
2359** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
2360were added
2361
2362- Function: remove ELT SEQ
2363
8a33023e 2364Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
27848c01
GM
2365a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
2366
2367- Function: remq ELT LIST
2368
8a33023e 2369Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The
27848c01
GM
2370comparison is done with `eq'.
2371
1c14ba45 2372+++
27848c01 2373** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 2374
b548072f
GM
2375** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
2376has been changed.
2377
424d8b44 2378+++
07b14857
KH
2379** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
2380without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
2381convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
2382
1c14ba45 2383+++
9662da0b
GM
2384** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
2385or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 2386
7fce7efb
DL
2387** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
2388function was declared obsolete.
2389
1c14ba45 2390+++
5d94f558 2391** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
2392retained as an alias).
2393
f98d3086
SM
2394** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
2395It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
2396is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
2397
87efd256
GM
2398** The new function `window-list' has been defined
2399
39b39373
GM
2400- Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF
2401
2402Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or
2403omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use
2404the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window,
2405even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the
2406minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t
2407means never include the minibuffer window.
87efd256 2408
67c9a1d2
GM
2409** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
2410
2411- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
2412
2413Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
2414
2415This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
2416calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
2417argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
2418value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
2419returned.
2420
2421Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
2422if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
2423it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
2424minibuffer even if it is active.
2425
2426Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
2427counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
2428too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
2429and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
2430`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
2431entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
2432
2433ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
2434ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
2435ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
2436ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
2437ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
2438If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
2439Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
2440
ead53494
GM
2441** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
2442event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
2443argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 2444
25fa6deb
GM
2445** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
2446call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
2447message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
2448Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 2449
5b034b7f 2450+++
5d94f558 2451** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
2452meaning no limit.
2453
5b034b7f
EZ
2454+++
2455** The new user option `line-number-display-limit-width' controls
2456the maximum width of lines in a buffer for which Emacs displays line
2457numbers in the mode line. The default is 200.
2458
5d94f558 2459** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
2460coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
2461DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
2462
9b2999d0
DL
2463+++
2464** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument
2465list of a primitive.
de370c4c 2466
c286608e
SM
2467** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps.
2468
9b2999d0 2469+++
80c05bd3
DL
2470** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
2471buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
2472This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
2473than replacing the local map.
2474
14fd0da3
DL
2475** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and
2476`after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been
2477removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions'
2478instead.
45f485a6
GM
2479
2480** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
2481
f6499c03 2482+++
c286608e
SM
2483** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments,
2484as promised long ago.
f0298744 2485
5d94f558 2486** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
ac57988b
GM
2487
2488** The new variable auto-coding-regexp-alist specifies coding systems
2489for reading specific files, analogous to auto-coding-alist, but
2490patterns are checked against file contents instead of file names.
2491
05197f40 2492\f
a933dad1
DL
2493* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
2494
2495Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2496--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2497When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2498so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2499
697617d9
GM
2500*** The features `md5' and `overlay' are now provided by default.
2501
85c75536
MB
2502*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
2503buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
2504the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
2505restriction to be restored incorrectly.
2506
0b8a3a6d
DL
2507*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
2508`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
028d739a 2509when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a
0b8a3a6d
DL
2510multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
2511
2512*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
2513`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
2514contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
2515
2516*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
2517changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
2518[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
2519regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
2520the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
2521extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
2522bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
2523eight-bit-graphic.
2524
2525** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
2526
9b2a085d 2527A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for
0b8a3a6d
DL
2528a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
2529character set as previously.
2530
2531*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
2532They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
2533modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
2534
2535CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
2536characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
2537range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
2538case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
2539
2540FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
9b2a085d 2541name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2542
2543*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
2544registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
2545"fontset-default".
2546
2547*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
2548argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
2549
2550** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
2551composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
2552buffers and strings.
2553
2554*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
2555character' which is an independent character with a unique character
2556code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
2557have been deleted: composite-char-component,
2558composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
2559composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
2560The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
2561also been deleted.
2562
2563*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
2564specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
2565`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
2566
2567*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
2568MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
2569composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
2570may differ between buffer and string text.
2571
2572*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
2573COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
2574
2575*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
2576directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
2577Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
2578`composition' from STRING.
2579
2580*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
2581a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
2582
2583*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
2584obsolete.
2585
889be0a1
DL
2586** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on
2587the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text.
2588
965bc065 2589** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff',
1e36ff68
DL
2590`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been
2591introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF,
2592U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 2593
3d7a4ec8
EZ
2594Note that the character sets are not yet unified in Emacs, so
2595characters which belong to charsets such as Latin-2, Greek, Hebrew,
2596etc. and the same characters in the `mule-unicode-*' charsets are
2597different characters, as far as Emacs is concerned. For example, text
2598which includes Unicode characters from the Latin-2 locale cannot be
2599encoded by Emacs with ISO 8859-2 coding system.
2600
2601** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added.
2602It provides limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For
2603details, please see the documentation string of this coding system.
23cfab61 2604
0b8a3a6d 2605** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1e36ff68
DL
2606`japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese
2607standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
2608
2609** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15'
2610have been introduced.
0b8a3a6d
DL
2611
2612+++
2613** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1e36ff68 2614have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
028d739a
DL
26150xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of
2616eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the
2617emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the
2018166d
DL
2618buffer/string internal representation. Note that to search for
2619eight-bit-graphic characters in a multibyte buffer, the search string
2620must be multibyte, otherwise such characters will be converted to
2621their multibyte equivalent.
0b8a3a6d 2622
399da7e3 2623+++
f0124b4a
DL
2624** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
2625that offset in the file before writing.
2626
f98d3086
SM
2627** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
2628compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 2629
612839b6
GM
2630** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
2631`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
2632from which the command was issued.
2633
2634** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
2635`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
2636`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
2637additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
2638operate on.
2639
271b4185
GM
2640** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
2641to `window-buffer-height'.
2642
2643- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
2644
2645Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
2646The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
2647lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
2648
2649Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
2650respectively.
2651
8a33023e 2652If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument
271b4185
GM
2653COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
2654
2655The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
2656obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
2657on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
2658
2659Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
2660buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
2661possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
2662is currently displayed in some window.
2663
3c30cb6e
DL
2664** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
2665argument function's results.
2666
62f20204
GM
2667** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
2668signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
2669
c0510d27 2670** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
b4da8dfa 2671header in the list of headers passed to it.
c0510d27
GM
2672
2673** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
2674ignores differences in case and text representation.
2675
2676** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
2677cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
2678as follows:
2679
2680 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
2681 nil don't display a cursor
2682 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
2683 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
2684 others display a box cursor.
2685
9a0dd3dc
GM
2686** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
2687an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
2688defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
2689set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
2690
d7b511c4 2691** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 2692specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
2693the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
2694text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
2695
2696Example:
2697
2698 (string-to-syntax "()")
2699 => (4 . 41)
2700
1fa28578
GM
2701** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
2702other than 10.
2703
2704*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
2705INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
2706
5d94f558 2707 #b1111
1fa28578 2708 => 15
5d94f558 2709 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
2710 => -15
2711
2712*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
2713
5d94f558 2714 #o666
1fa28578
GM
2715 => 438
2716
2717*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
2718
5d94f558 2719 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
2720 => 48815
2721
2722*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
2723
5d94f558 2724 #2R-111
1fa28578 2725 => -7
5d94f558 2726 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
2727 => 267
2728
3d4ff2dd 2729** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 2730the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
2731and isn't a string.
2732
3d4ff2dd
GM
2733** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
2734a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
2735value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
2736not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
2737
16ce590d
DL
2738+++
2739** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
2740
73825616 2741** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
2742for a regexp in a string.
2743
2744** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
2745`mouse-position-function'.
2746
723e779c
GM
2747** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
2748that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
2749
d1e103b2
GM
2750** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2751Keywords are now always considered constants.
2752
31047e0d
DL
2753+++
2754** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
2755returns it.
2756
7a85e4df
GM
2757** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
2758returned by function `recent-keys'.
2759
02b14400
RS
2760+++
2761** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
2762can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
2763Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
2764etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
2765mode.
404fa7d6 2766
02b14400 2767+++
8964fec7
SM
2768** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
2769and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
2770
02b14400
RS
2771+++
2772** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
2773has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
2774function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
2775returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
2776been performed."
2777
2778When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
2779and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
2780hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
2781then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 2782
02b14400 2783+++
81da8b32
GM
2784** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
2785In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
2786and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
2787
02b14400 2788+++
9e207b90
GM
2789** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
2790with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
2791specified table.
2792
2793 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
2794
2795Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
2796TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
2797saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
2798what BODY returns.
9e207b90 2799
02b14400 2800+++
d7f89643 2801** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 2802Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8a33023e 2803Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the
601e0081
SM
2804corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet).
2805Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\').
8964fec7 2806
02b14400 2807+++
dde9e75a
GM
2808** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
2809removed since it wasn't used by anything.
2810
02b14400 2811+++
9da30515
GM
2812** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
2813instead of being optional.
2814
02b14400 2815+++
d20679eb
GM
2816** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
2817modify read-only text.
2818
fbc164de
PE
2819** New functions and variables for locales.
2820
2018166d 2821+++
fbc164de
PE
2822The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
2823decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
2824time functions like strftime. The new variables
2825`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
2826locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
2827
2828The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
2829environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
2830the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
2831environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
2832not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
2833`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
2834`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 2835
02b14400 2836+++
863476d1
SM
2837** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
2838To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
2839modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
2840start sequences.
2841
02b14400 2842+++
ef6d912c
GM
2843** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
2844because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
2845
02b14400 2846+++
a933dad1
DL
2847** New function `propertize'
2848
2849The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
2850strings with text properties.
2851
2852- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
2853
2854Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
2855by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
2856PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
2857specified value of that property. Example:
2858
2859 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
2860
2861+++
2862** push and pop macros.
2863
02b14400
RS
2864Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
2865are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
2866as the place that holds the list to be changed.
2867
2868(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
2869(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
2870 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
2871
02b14400
RS
2872** New dolist and dotimes macros.
2873
6c7fd5aa
RS
2874Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
2875are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
2876
2877(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
2878 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
2879 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
2880 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2881
2882(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
2883 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
2884 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
2885 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
2886
a933dad1 2887+++
6c083b4c
GM
2888** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as
2889[:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character
2890class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period
2891or a sign.
a933dad1
DL
2892
2893[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
2894[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
2895[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
2896[:blank:] matches space and tab only
2897[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
2898 space, and DEL.
2899[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
2900 and DEL.
2901[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
2902 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2903 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2904[:alpha:] matches letters.
2905 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2906 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2907[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2908[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2909[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2910[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2911 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2912 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2913[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2914[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2915[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2916
2917+++
2918** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2919
2920The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2921
2922- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2923
2924The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2925are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2926
2927:test TEST
2928
2929TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2930Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2931it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2932
2933:size SIZE
2934
2935SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2936many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2937
2938:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2939
2940REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2941full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2942size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
29431.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2944old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2945
2946:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2947
2948THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2949hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2950(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2951
2952:weakness WEAK
2953
b548072f
GM
2954WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2955`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2956`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2957collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2958outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2959
2960- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2961
2962Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2963
2964- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2965
2966Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2967
2968- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2969
2970Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2971values are shared.
2972
2973- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2974
2975Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2976
2977- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2978
2979Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2980
2981- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2982
2983Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2984
2985- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2986
2987Returns the size of TABLE.
2988
d96d6bb0 2989- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2990
2991Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2992
2993- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2994
2995Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2996
2997- Function: clrhash TABLE
2998
2999Clear TABLE.
3000
3001- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
3002
3003Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
3004not found.
3005
79214ddf 3006- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
3007
3008Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
3009another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
3010
3011- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
3012
3013Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
3014
3015- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
3016
3017Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
3018arguments KEY and VALUE.
3019
3020- Function: sxhash OBJ
3021
3022Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
3023
3024- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
3025
3026Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
3027a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 3028comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
3029and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
3030of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
3031
3032TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
3033
3034HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
3035code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
3036integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
3037
3038Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
3039be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
3040
3041 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
3042 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
3043
3044 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
3045 (sxhash (upcase a)))
3046
79214ddf 3047 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
3048 'case-fold-string-hash))
3049
3050 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
3051
3052+++
3053** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
3054
3055It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
3056circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
3057a cons cell which is its own cdr.
3058
3059+++
3060** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
3061
3062If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
3063#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
3064
a933dad1
DL
3065+++
3066** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
3067t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
3068specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
3069is too short to reach that column.
3070
3071+++
3072** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
3073now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
3074after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
3075two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
3076
3077If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
3078perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
3079and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
3080
3081+++
3082** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
3083to specify which buffer to return the size of.
3084
3085+++
3086** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
3087calendar-move-hook after moving point.
3088
3089+++
3090** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
3091directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
3092small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
3093small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
3094temporary-file-directory instead.
3095
3096+++
3097** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
3098the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
3099`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
3100hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
3101
3102+++
2018166d
DL
3103** assq-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
3104elements of an alist which have a car `eq' to a particular value.
a933dad1
DL
3105
3106+++
3107** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
3108
3109make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
3110creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
3111ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
3112
3113+++
3114** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
3115
3116The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
3117on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
3118is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
3119never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
3120ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
3121overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
3122
3123If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
3124that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
3125to get an error if the file exists at that time.
3126The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
3127
3128+++
3129** Function `format' now handles text properties.
3130
3131Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
3132If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
3133ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
3134result string.
3135
3136Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
3137string where arguments appear in the result string.
3138
3139Example:
3140
3141 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
3142 (s2 "world"))
3143 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
3144 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 3145 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
3146
3147results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
3148
3149+++
3150** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
3151
3152Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
3153The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
3154argument in it.
3155
3156 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
3157 (arg "world"))
3158 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
3159 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
3160 (message msg arg))
3161
3162+++
3163** Sound support
3164
3165Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
3166(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
3167
3168Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
3169(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
3170to enable sound support.
3171
3172Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
3173list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
3174when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
3175functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
3176sound to play, before playing the sound.
3177
3178The following sound properties are supported:
3179
3180- `:file FILE'
3181
3182FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
3183searched relative to `data-directory'.
3184
6fb40beb
GM
3185- `:data DATA'
3186
3187DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
3188may be present, but not both.
3189
a933dad1
DL
3190- `:volume VOLUME'
3191
3192VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
31930..1. This property is optional.
3194
01242779
DL
3195- `:device DEVICE'
3196
3197DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the
3198sound. The default device is system-dependent.
3199
a933dad1
DL
3200Other properties are ignored.
3201
01242779
DL
3202An alternative interface is called as
3203(play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE).
3204
a933dad1 3205** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4 3206
9b2999d0 3207+++
356673d4
DL
3208** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
3209a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
3210
3211** Changes to garbage collection
3212
3213*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
3214of live and free strings.
3215
3216*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
3217strings that have been consed so far.
3218
05197f40 3219\f
04545643
GM
3220* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
3221Lisp Manual
3222
f7eb32aa 3223+++
a299a6f0
GM
3224** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes
3225mini-windows.
3226
9b2999d0 3227+++
26fcde61
MB
3228** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional
3229argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is
3230returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil.
ea4c1b7c 3231
a299a6f0 3232** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used.
82a452c8 3233
9a8d84ca
DL
3234+++
3235** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2 3236
9b2999d0 3237+++
2c69ced2
GM
3238** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
3239image.
3240
3241- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
3242
3243Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
3244
3245SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
3246measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
3247character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
3248font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
3249FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
3250
9b2999d0 3251+++
ebb8f116
GM
3252** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image
3253has a mask bitmap.
3254
3255- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME
3256
3257Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap.
3258FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil
3259or omitted means use the selected frame.
3260
f6499c03 3261+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
3262** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
3263satisfying one of a list of specifications.
3264
3265+++
3266** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
3267optional.
3268
f6499c03
DL
3269+++
3270** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see
3271below).
04545643 3272
05197f40 3273\f
a933dad1
DL
3274* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
3275
3276Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
3277--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
3278When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
3279so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
3280
f6d3257b
GM
3281** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
3282to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
3283
3284Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
3285text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
3286is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
3287your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
3288laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
3289just display it black instead.
3290
3291This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
3292a line like
3293
3294 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
3295
3296in your `.emacs'.
3297
a933dad1
DL
3298** New face implementation.
3299
3300Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
3301font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
3302
3303+++
3304*** New faces.
3305
3306Each face can specify the following display attributes:
3307
3308 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 3309
a933dad1
DL
3310 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
3311 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 3312
a933dad1 3313 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 3314
a933dad1 3315 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 3316
a933dad1 3317 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 3318
a933dad1 3319 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 3320
a933dad1
DL
3321 7. Background color.
3322
3323 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
3324
3325 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
3326
3327 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
3328
3329 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
3330
3331 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
3332 color.
3333
3334 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
3335 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
3336
3337Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
3338same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
3339frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
3340faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
0969bd6a 3341with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face
a933dad1
DL
3342attributes mentioned above.
3343
3344There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
3345definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
3346created frames.
79214ddf 3347
a933dad1
DL
3348A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
3349have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
3350`fully-specified'.
3351
3352+++
3353*** Face merging.
3354
3355The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
3356combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
3357aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
3358properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
3359that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
3360results in a fully-specified face.
3361
3362+++
3363*** Face realization.
3364
3365After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
3366merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
3367realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
3368available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
3369face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
3370cache of the frame on which it was realized.
3371
3372Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
3373character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
3374for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
3375charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
3376
3377Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
3378specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
3379being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
3380the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
3381statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
3382
3383In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
3384`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
33850x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
3386the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
3387initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
3388Emacs.
3389
3390Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
3391`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
3392registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
3393with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
3394
a7c13351 3395+++
a933dad1
DL
3396**** Clearing face caches.
3397
3398The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
3399on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
3400unused fonts.
3401
3402+++
3403*** Font selection.
79214ddf 3404
a933dad1
DL
3405Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
3406given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
3407for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
3408
3409If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
3410pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
3411family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
3412property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
3413an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
3414
3415Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
3416against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
3417match for the given face attributes in this font list.
3418
3419Font selection can be influenced by the user.
3420
3421The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
3422attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
3423face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
3424names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
3425that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
3426width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
3427to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
3428
52d89894
GM
3429Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify
3430alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face
89d57763 3431doesn't exist.
af4bb4c8
KH
3432
3433Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify
8a33023e 3434all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a
af4bb4c8
KH
3435registry.
3436
8a33023e 3437Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are
af4bb4c8
KH
3438slightly different.
3439
3440Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts.
3441
a933dad1
DL
3442
3443+++
3444**** Scalable fonts
3445
3446Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
3447since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
3448servers.
3449
3450To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 3451`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
3452scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
3453Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
3454scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
3455that list. Example:
3456
3457 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
3458
3459allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
3460
3461+++
3462*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
3463
3464- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
3465
3466Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
3467is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
3468string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
3469
3470If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
3471the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
3472FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
3473POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
3474SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
3475These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
3476if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
3477REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
3478the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
3479of the face font sort order.
3480
79214ddf 3481- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
3482
3483Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
3484omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
3485(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
3486non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
3487
3488- Variable: font-list-limit
3489
3490Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
3491won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
3492matching font. The default is currently 100.
3493
3494+++
3495*** Setting face attributes.
3496
3497For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
3498with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
3499implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
3500`face-attribute'.
3501
3502Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
3503symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
3504
3505The following attributes are recognized:
3506
3507`:family'
3508
3509VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
3510or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
3511and `?' are allowed.
3512
3513`:width'
3514
3515VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
3516It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
3517`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
3518`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
3519
3520`:height'
3521
787345ff
MB
3522VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use
3523in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to
3524scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old
3525height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height.
a933dad1
DL
3526
3527`:weight'
3528
3529VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
3530symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
3531`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
3532
3533`:slant'
3534
3535VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
3536symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
3537`reverse-oblique'.
3538
3539`:foreground', `:background'
3540
3541VALUE must be a color name, a string.
3542
3543`:underline'
3544
3545VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
3546VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
3547a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
3548don't underline.
3549
3550`:overline'
3551
3552VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
3553VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
3554string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
3555overline.
3556
3557`:strike-through'
3558
3559VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
3560striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
3561face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
3562is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
3563
3564`:box'
3565
3566VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
3567around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
3568VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
3569of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
3570and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
3571VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
3572:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
3573the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
3574specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
3575defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
3576the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
3577color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
3578should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
3579like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
3580that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
3581the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
3582box.
3583
3584`:inverse-video'
3585
3586VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
3587inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
3588
3589`:stipple'
3590
3591If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
3592The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
3593searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
3594HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
3595is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
3596explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
3597
3598For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
3599and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
3600
3601`:font'
3602
3603Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
3604XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
3605is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
3606versions of Emacs.
3607
3608For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
3609be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
3610must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
3611
3612Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
3613`defface'.
3614
787345ff
MB
3615`:inherit'
3616
3617VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list
3618of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face
3619like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces.
3620
a933dad1
DL
3621*** Face attributes and X resources
3622
3623The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
3624from X resources:
3625
3626 Face attribute X resource class
3627-----------------------------------------------------------------------
3628 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
3629 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
3630 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
3631 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
3632 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
3633 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
3634 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
3635 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
3636 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
3637 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
3638 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
3639 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
3640 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 3641 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
3642 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
3643 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3644 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
3645 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
3646 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
3647
3648+++
3649*** Text property `face'.
3650
3651The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
3652specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
3653specification can be
3654
36551. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
3656
36572. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
3658 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
3659 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
3660 for face attribute names.
3661
36623. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
3663 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
3664 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
3665
3666+++
3667** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
3668
acf3ecb7
EZ
3669The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
3670on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
3671the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 3672default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 3673`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
3674used to clear the mapping table.
3675
acf3ecb7
EZ
3676** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
3677
3678The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
3679and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
3680type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
3681color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
3682display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
3683old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
3684`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
3685compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
3686should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
3687modify their color-related behavior.
3688
3689The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
3690any frame type.
3691
8a5719f0
EZ
3692** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
3693
3694The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
3695`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
3696`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
3697`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
3698`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
3699`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
3700display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
3701the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
3702platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
3703
a933dad1
DL
3704+++
3705** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 3706
463cac2d 3707This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
3b51cca0
MB
3708To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize
3709the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the
3710`Inviolable' option.
a933dad1 3711
8a33023e 3712The function minibuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
a933dad1
DL
3713end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
3714Otherwise, it returns zero.
3715
463cac2d
GM
3716** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
3717
3718There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
3719buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 3720property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 3721
9a9dfda8 3722Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 3723forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 3724to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 3725not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
3726commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
3727boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
3728`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
3729functions.
463cac2d
GM
3730
3731Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 3732a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 3733editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 3734
9a9dfda8
GM
3735The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
3736
59927f88 3737- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
3738
3739Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 3740
9a9dfda8
GM
3741A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
3742If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
9b2a085d 3743constrained position if that is different.
9a9dfda8
GM
3744
3745If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
3746positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
3747ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 3748constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
3749as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3750is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
3751fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
3752the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
3753also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
3754
3755If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
3756NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
3757unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
3758C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
3759only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
3760
59927f88
MB
3761If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
3762a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
3763
3764Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
3765
3766- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 3767
59927f88 3768Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 3769A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3770If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3771
3772- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3773
3774Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
3775A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3776If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3777If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
3778field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
3779
3780- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
3781
3782Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
3783A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
3784If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
3785If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
3786then the end of the *following* field is returned.
3787
3788- Function: field-string &optional POS
3789
3790Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
3791A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3792If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
3793
3794- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
3795
3796Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
3797A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 3798If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 3799
a933dad1
DL
3800+++
3801** Image support.
3802
3803Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
3804strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
3805(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
3806replaces the display of the characters having that property.
3807
3808If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
3809`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
3810AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
3811window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
3812area.
3813
3814IMAGE is an image specification.
3815
3816*** Image specifications
3817
3818Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
3819is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
3820specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
3821symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
3822described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
3823
3824The following is a list of properties all image types share.
3825
3826`:ascent ASCENT'
3827
576da55d
GM
3828ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
3829If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 3830to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
3831
3832If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
3833image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
3834
5d94f558 3835If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
3836centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
3837of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
3838overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
3839
3840`:margin MARGIN'
3841
b30623be
GM
3842MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put
3843as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the
3844horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0.
a933dad1
DL
3845
3846`:relief RELIEF'
3847
3848RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
3849around an image.
3850
f864120f 3851`:conversion ALGO'
a933dad1 3852
47e351a3
GM
3853Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it.
3854
3855ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss''
3856edge-detection algorithm to the image.
3857
3858ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means
3859apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a
3860nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at
3861position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels
3862around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the
3863neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the
3864transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at
3865x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown
3866below.
3867
3868 (x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1
3869 x-1/y x/y x+1/y
3870 x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1)
3871
3872The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color
3873resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels,
3874multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum
3875of the factors' absolute values.
3876
327652be 3877Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of
a933dad1 3878
47e351a3
GM
3879 (1 0 0
3880 0 0 0
3881 9 9 -1)
3882
3883Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of
3884
3885 ( 2 -1 0
3886 -1 0 1
3887 0 1 -2)
3888
ba9eeda1
GM
3889ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks
3890``disabled''.
3891
47e351a3
GM
3892`:mask MASK'
3893
3894If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for
3895the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the
3896image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the
3897background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the
8a33023e 3898image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is
47e351a3
GM
3899the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED
3900GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the
3901image.
a933dad1 3902
47e351a3
GM
3903If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images
3904in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying
3905`:mask nil'.
a933dad1
DL
3906
3907`:file FILE'
3908
3909Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
3910search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
3911building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
3912may be present in the image specification.
3913
518df5c4
GM
3914`:data DATA'
3915
3916Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
3917supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
3918present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
3919support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
3920
a933dad1
DL
3921*** Supported image types
3922
b246b1f6 3923**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
3924
3925XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
3926properties supported are
3927
3928`:foreground FG'
3929
94736c7c
GM
3930FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
3931meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground.
a933dad1 3932
46c5af7f 3933`:background BG'
a933dad1 3934
94736c7c
GM
3935BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
3936meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
3937
3938XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
3939case, the image specification must contain the following properties
3940instead of a `:file' property.
3941
3942`:width WIDTH'
3943
3944WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
3945
3946`:height HEIGHT'
3947
3948HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
3949
3950`:data DATA'
3951
3952DATA must be either
3953
3954 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
3955 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
3956
3957 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
3958
3959 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
3960 bitmap.
3961
c76e04a8
GM
3962 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
3963 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
3964 in the file.
3965
a933dad1
DL
3966**** XPM, image type `xpm'
3967
3968XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
3969`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
3970found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
3971`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
3972
3973Additional image properties supported are:
3974
3975`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
3976
3977SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
3978name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
3979name.
3980
3981XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
3982add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
3983
a933dad1
DL
3984The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
3985to display compressed images.
3986
3987**** PBM, image type `pbm'
3988
3989PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2b8e9c91
GM
3990mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for
3991mono images are
3992
3993`:foreground FG'
3994
94736c7c
GM
3995FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
3996meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground.
2b8e9c91
GM
3997
3998`:background FG'
3999
94736c7c
GM
4000BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil
4001meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color.
a933dad1
DL
4002
4003**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
4004
4005Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
4006package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
4007are:
4008
a933dad1
DL
4009**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
4010
4011Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
4012package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
4013properties defined.
4014
4015**** GIF, image type `gif'
4016
4017Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
4018`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
4019
4020Additional image properties supported are:
4021
4022`:index INDEX'
4023
4024INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
8a33023e 4025multi-image GIF file. An error is signaled if INDEX is too large.
a933dad1
DL
4026
4027This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
4028For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
4029at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
4030every 0.1 seconds.
4031
4032(defun show-anim (file max)
4033 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
4034 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
4035
4036(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
4037 (when (= idx max)
4038 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 4039 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
4040 (save-excursion
4041 (set-buffer buffer)
4042 (goto-char (point-min))
4043 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
4044 (insert-image img "x"))
4045 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
4046
4047**** PNG, image type `png'
4048
4049Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
4050package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
4051properties defined.
4052
4053**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
4054
4055Additional image properties supported are:
4056
4057`:pt-width WIDTH'
4058
4059WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 4060integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
4061
4062`:pt-height HEIGHT'
4063
4064HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 4065must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
4066
4067`:bounding-box BOX'
4068
4069BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
4070the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
4071files. This is an required property.
4072
4073Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
4074lisp/gs.el.
4075
4076*** Lisp interface.
4077
79214ddf
FP
4078The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
4079which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
4080
4081Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
4082they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
4083The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
4084manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
4085images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
4086
4087*** Simplified image API, image.el
4088
4089The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
4090creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
4091can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
4092define an image based on available image types. The functions
4093`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
4094buffer.
4095
4096+++
4097** Display margins.
4098
4099Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
4100and images.
4101
4102To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
4103`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
4104`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
4105obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
4106`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
4107the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
4108of the display margins.
4109
4110You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
4111containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
4112one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
4113string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
4114in this file).
4115
4116+++
4117** Help display
4118
4119Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
4120moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
4121`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
4122that have a `help-echo' property.
4123
9662da0b 4124If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 4125is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
4126the window in which the help was found.
4127
4128If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
4129`help-echo' text property was found.
4130
4131If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
4132POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
4133
4134If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 4135the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 4136mouse.
d5aa31d8 4137
9662da0b
GM
4138If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
4139string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
4140
4141For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
4142determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
4143property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
4144For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
4145used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
4146
4147The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
4148the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
4149causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
4150
4151+++
4152** Vertical fractional scrolling.
4153
4154The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
4155This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
4156
4157The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
4158scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
4159The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
4160scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
4161used.
4162
79214ddf
FP
4163 (global-set-key [A-down]
4164 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 4165 (interactive)
79214ddf 4166 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 4167 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 4168 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
4169 #'(lambda ()
4170 (interactive)
79214ddf 4171 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
4172 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
4173
4174+++
4175** New hook `fontification-functions'.
4176
4177Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
4178when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
4179variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
4180is called with one argument, POS.
4181
4182At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
4183characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
4184as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
4185property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
4186`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
4187
4188+++
4189** Tool bar support.
4190
4191Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
4192parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
4193controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
4194suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
4195`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
4196automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
4197
4198*** Tool bar item definitions
4199
4200Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
4201`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
4202where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 4203
a933dad1
DL
4204CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
4205evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
4206the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
4207property (see below).
79214ddf 4208
a933dad1
DL
4209BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
4210binding are currently ignored.
4211
4212The following properties are recognized:
4213
4214`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 4215
a933dad1
DL
4216FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
4217or disabled.
79214ddf 4218
a933dad1 4219`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 4220
a933dad1 4221FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 4222
a933dad1
DL
4223`:filter FUNCTION'
4224
4225FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
4226FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
4227used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 4228
a933dad1
DL
4229`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
4230
4231TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
4232and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 4233
a933dad1
DL
4234`:image IMAGES'
4235
4236IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
4237image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
4238meaning of each of the four elements:
4239
4240 Index Use when item is
4241 ----------------------------------------
4242 0 enabled and selected
4243 1 enabled and deselected
4244 2 disabled and selected
4245 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 4246
4ba7246d
GM
4247If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
4248algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
4249
a933dad1 4250`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 4251
a933dad1
DL
4252Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
4253is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
4254
dab96841 4255The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding
d1e68bce
DL
4256toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used
4257to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the
4258menu bar.
dab96841 4259
8628686a
DL
4260The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar
4261dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set
4262buffer-locally to override the global map.
4263
a933dad1
DL
4264*** Tool-bar-related variables.
4265
4266If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
4267resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
4268than 1/4 of the frame's size.
4269
79214ddf 4270If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
4271raised when the mouse moves over them.
4272
4273You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
4274`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
b30623be
GM
4275pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and
4276vertical margins . Default is 1.
a933dad1
DL
4277
4278You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
4279`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
4280
4281*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
4282
4283You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 4284a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
4285
4286 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
4287 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
4288 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
4289
4290is the original tool bar item definition, then
4291
4292 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
4293
4294makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
4295item.
4296
4297** Mode line changes.
4298
4299+++
4300*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
4301
4302The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
4303that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
4304a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
4305
43061. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
4307a `local-map' text property.
4308
43092. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
4310that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
4311
43123. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
4313is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
4314`local-map' property.
4315
4316The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
4317properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
4318example.
4319
54522c9f
GM
4320*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
4321evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
4322
a933dad1
DL
4323+++
4324*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
4325variable mode-line-format to nil.
4326
4327+++
4328*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
4329
4330This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
4331`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
4332completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
4333`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
4334line.
4335
4336The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
4337`header-line'.
4338
4339The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
4340position in the header-line.
4341
4342+++
4343** Text property `display'
4344
623a0aae
GM
4345The `display' text property is used to insert images into text,
4346replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is
4347also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of
4348the `display' property should be a display specification, as described
a933dad1
DL
4349below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
4350
623a0aae
GM
4351*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas
4352
4353To replace the text having the `display' property with some other
4354text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'.
4355
4356If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left
4357marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in
4358the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING
4359is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4360simpler form STRING as property value.
4361
a933dad1
DL
4362*** Variable width and height spaces
4363
4364To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
4365specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
4366`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
4367area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
4368marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
4369displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
4370simpler form STRETCH as property value.
4371
4372The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
4373PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
4374properties described below.
4375
4376The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
4377characters having the `display' property.
4378
4379- :width WIDTH
4380
4381Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
4382character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
4383
4384- :relative-width FACTOR
4385
4386Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
4387first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
4388same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
4389width of that character by FACTOR.
4390
4391- :align-to HPOS
4392
4393Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
4394value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
4395
4396Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
4397
4398- :height HEIGHT
4399
4400Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
4401normal line height.
4402
4403- :relative-height FACTOR
4404
4405The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
4406of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
4407
4408- :ascent ASCENT
4409
4410Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
4411used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
4412baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
4413equal to 100.
4414
4415You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
4416
4417*** Images
4418
4419A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
4420. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
4421in the display, the characters having this display specification in
4422their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
4423the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
4424`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
4425area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
4426the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
4427as display specification.
4428
4429*** Other display properties
4430
c9e73000 4431- (space-width FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4432
4433Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
4434should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
4435integer or float.
4436
c9e73000 4437- (height HEIGHT)
a933dad1
DL
4438
4439Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
4440
4441If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
4442means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
4443the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
4444``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
4445a font is available counts as a step.
4446
4447If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
4448as tall as the frame's default font.
4449
4450If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
4451height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
4452
4453Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
4454`height' bound to the current specified font height.
4455
c9e73000 4456- (raise FACTOR)
a933dad1
DL
4457
4458FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
4459font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
4460raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
4461amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
c9e73000 4462`height' subproperty.
a933dad1
DL
4463
4464*** Conditional display properties
4465
4466All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
4467has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
4468applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
8a33023e 4469During evaluation, point is temporarily set to the end position of
a933dad1
DL
4470the text having the `display' property.
4471
4472The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
4473`(:when t SPEC)'.
4474
4475+++
4476** New menu separator types.
4477
4478Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
4479item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
4480treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
4481to specify other menu separator types.
4482
4483- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
4484
4485No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
4486separator occurs.
4487
4488- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
4489
4490A single line in the menu's foreground color.
4491
4492- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
4493
4494A double line in the menu's foreground color.
4495
4496- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
4497
4498A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4499
4500- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
4501
4502A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
4503
4504- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
4505
f3780fe4 4506A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form
a933dad1
DL
4507displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
4508
4509- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
4510
4511A single line with 3D raised appearance.
4512
4513- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
4514
4515A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
4516
4517- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
4518
4519A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
4520
4521- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
4522
4523Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4524
4525- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
4526
4527Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
4528
4529- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
4530
4531Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
4532
4533- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
4534
4535Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
4536
4537Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
4538the corresponding single-line separators.
4539
4540+++
4541** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
4542
4543The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
4544`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
4545Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
4546that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
4547default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
4548default background is the background color of the frame, and the
4549default foreground is black.
4550
4551The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
4552(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
4553`ScrollBarBackground').
4554
4555Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
4556settings for scroll bar colors.
4557
4558+++
4559** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
4560display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
4561
4562---
4563** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
4564starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
4565on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
4566line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
4567the original window start.
4568
4569---
4570** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
4571`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
4572now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
4573
4574+++
4575** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
4576
4577A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
4578`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
4579windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
4580other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
4581
4582The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
4583fixed-width and fixed-height.
4584
4585 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
4586
4587A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
4588fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
4589window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
4590change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
4591temporarily to nil, for example
4592
4593 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
4594 (enlarge-window 10))
4595
79214ddf 4596Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 4597or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
4598
4599** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
4600terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
4601to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
4602overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
4603horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
4604support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 4605
3787e12e 4606
0cb146bf 4607
05197f40 4608\f
3787e12e
GM
4609* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
4610
4611** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
4612input.
4613
4614** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
4615
4616** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
4617
4618** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
4619only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
4620exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
4621(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
4622(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
4623
4624** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
4625been added.
4626
05197f40 4627\f
3787e12e
GM
4628* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
4629
4630** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
4631
0cb146bf 4632
05197f40 4633\f
3787e12e
GM
4634* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
4635
4636** Not new, but not mentioned before:
4637M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
05197f40 4638\f
3787e12e
GM
4639* Changes in Emacs 20.4
4640
4641** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
4642
4643You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
4644Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
4645`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
4646
4647If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
4648is the one that is used.
4649
4650** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
4651the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
4652Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
4653separate from the command's regular output.
4654Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
4655says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
4656In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
4657the buffer name.
4658
4659When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
4660output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
4661it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
4662cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
4663
4664** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
4665the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
4666is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
4667created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
4668
4669** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
4670example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
4671match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
4672quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
4673
4674** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
4675now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
4676if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
4677they never ignore case.
4678
4679** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
4680under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
4681applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
4682of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
4683just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
4684convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
4685part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
4686
4687If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
4688the same format that was used in the file before.
4689
4690You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
4691`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
4692
4693** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
4694renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
4695This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
4696
4697** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
4698The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
4699buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
4700your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
4701is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
4702end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
4703Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
4704
4705The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
4706eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
4707control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
4708format. You can now customize these variables.
4709
4710** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
4711filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
4712filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
4713enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
4714
4715** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
4716in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
4717windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
4718
4719** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
4720dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
4721doesn't have any effect.
4722
4723** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
4724not one per buffer.
4725
4726** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
4727use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
4728 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
4729
4730** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
4731To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
4732`auto-show-mode' command.
4733
4734** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
4735avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
4736versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
4737choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
4738occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
4739
4740** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
4741cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
4742
4743** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
4744character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
4745feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
4746
4747** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
4748the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
4749interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
4750and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
4751
4752** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
4753
4754The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
4755that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
4756one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
4757codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
4758set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
4759
4760Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
4761from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
4762
4763IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
4764equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
4765a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
4766`?' on other systems.
4767
4768IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
4769feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
4770Unix.
4771
4772Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
4773current codepage when it starts.
4774
4775** Mail changes
4776
4777*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
4778`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
4779appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
4780non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
4781MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
4782headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
4783latin-1:
4784
4785 MIME-version: 1.0
4786 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
4787 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
4788
4789*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
4790default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
4791default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
4792sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
4793buffer-file-coding-system.
4794
4795You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
4796sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
4797mail.
4798
4799*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
4800if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
4801Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
4802list of possible coding systems.
4803
4804** CC Mode changes
4805
4806*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
4807modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
4808longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
4809docstring for details.
4810
4811*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
4812symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
4813found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
4814prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
4815lineup functions use this feature currently.
4816
4817*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
4818"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
4819
4820*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
4821"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
4822
4823*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
4824from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
4825symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
4826c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
4827anonymous classes.
4828
4829*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
4830syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
4831
4832*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
4833inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
4834support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
4835function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
4836
4837*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
4838(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
4839brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
4840c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
4841(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
4842
4843*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
4844
4845*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
4846
4847*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
4848for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
4849
4850*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
4851
4852*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
4853associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
4854This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
4855circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
4856class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
4857
4858** Gnus changes.
4859
4860*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
4861added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
4862Gnus manual for the full story.
4863
4864*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
4865before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
4866group, which is created automatically.
4867
4868*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
4869values.
4870
4871*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
4872
4873*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
4874outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
4875
4876*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
4877`C-u C-c C-c'.
4878
4879*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
4880
4881*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
4882re-highlighting of the article buffer.
4883
4884*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
4885
4886*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
4887Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
4888
4889*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
4890`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
4891
4892*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
4893control over simplification.
4894
4895*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
4896
4897*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
4898limit.
4899
4900*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
4901
4902*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
4903
4904*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
4905If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
4906rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
4907
8a33023e 4908*** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3787e12e
GM
4909`a' forces normal posting method.
4910
4911*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
4912-- `W d'.
4913
4914*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
4915to a non-nil value.
4916
4917*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
4918where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
4919
4920*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
4921has been added.
4922
4923*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
4924
4925*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
4926
4927*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
4928`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
4929
4930*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
4931`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
4932
4933*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
4934
4935*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
4936been added.
4937
4938*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
4939`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
4940
4941*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
4942updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
4943
4944*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
4945
4946*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
4947
4948*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
4949
4950** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
4951
4952*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
4953options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
4954nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
4955
4956*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
4957TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
4958of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
4959TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
4960can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
4961
4962*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
4963All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
4964but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
4965the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
4966
4967*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
4968the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
4969buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
4970mismatch.
4971
4972** Changes to RefTeX mode
4973
4974*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
4975file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
4976
4977*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
4978lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
4979characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
4980removed from the label.
4981
4982*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
4983a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
4984
4985*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
4986customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
4987
4988*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
4989`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
4990expressions.
4991
4992*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
4993
4994** New/deleted modes and packages
4995
4996*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
4997SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
4998
4999*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
5000editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
5001SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
5002
5003*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
5004changes with a special face.
5005
5006*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
5007this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
5008Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
05197f40 5009\f
3787e12e
GM
5010* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
5011
5012** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
5013This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
5014conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
5015and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
5016check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
5017
5018The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
5019Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
5020distribution when the config.bat script is run.
5021
5022** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
5023MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
5024controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
5025directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
5026Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
5027on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
5028string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
5029program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
5030printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
5031
5032** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
5033output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
5034available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
5035input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
5036temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
5037program.
5038
5039An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
5040and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
5041programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
5042automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
5043as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
5044ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
5045
5046** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
5047a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
5048MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
5049was not documented clearly before.
5050
5051** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
5052This includes Tetris and Snake.
05197f40 5053\f
3787e12e
GM
5054* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
5055
5056** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
5057return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
5058They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
5059meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
5060
5061** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
5062WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
5063and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
5064
5065** Changes in the file-attributes function.
5066
5067*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
5068It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
5069
5070*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
5071the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
5072integers.
5073
5074** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
5075files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
5076arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
5077file names and attributes are returned.
5078
5079** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
5080sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
8a33023e 5081accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes.
3787e12e
GM
5082It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
5083returns the result.
5084
5085** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
5086to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
5087
5088** New functions for base64 conversion:
5089
5090The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
5091into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
5092performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
5093optionally.
5094
5095Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
5096job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
5097
5098**
5099The new function process-running-child-p
5100will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
5101terminal to its own child process.
5102
5103** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
5104when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
5105to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
5106itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
5107
5108** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
5109be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
5110
5111** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
5112:included is an alias for :visible.
5113
5114easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
5115easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
5116to move or copy menu entries.
5117
5118** Multibyte editing changes
5119
5120*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
5121an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
5122make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
5123work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
5124char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
5125 (setq char (sref str idx)
5126 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
5127The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
5128
5129If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
5130(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
5131 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
5132
5133*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
5134region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
5135deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
5136
8a33023e 5137 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited
3787e12e
GM
5138
5139This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
5140across the boundary.
5141
5142*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
5143`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
5144 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
5145 contains 8-bit characters.
5146 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
5147 contains invalid characters.
5148
5149*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
5150text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
5151preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
5152text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
5153way.
5154
5155*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
5156If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
5157end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
5158prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
5159
5160*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
5161compose Thai characters in a string.
5162
5163** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
5164argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
5165for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
5166menus should always use the third argument.
5167
5168** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
5169read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
5170arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
5171input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
5172
5173** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
5174of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
5175programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
5176inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
5177
5178** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
5179the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
5180returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
5181echo area contents.
5182
5183 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
5184
5185** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
5186NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
5187requested feature cannot be loaded.
5188
5189** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
5190foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
5191means to clear out that attribute.
5192
5193** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
5194gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
5195
5196** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
5197read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
5198unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
5199end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
5200
5201** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
5202the gap of the current buffer.
5203
5204** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
5205to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
5206current buffer.
5207
5208** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
5209facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
5210These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
5211it back in after any modifications have been made.
05197f40 5212\f
3787e12e
GM
5213* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
5214
5215** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
5216the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
5217/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
5218directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
5219subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
5220
5221Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
5222names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
5223Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
5224which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
5225these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
5226
5227Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
5228starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
5229time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
5230
5231This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
5232Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
5233to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
5234subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
5235`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
5236results.
5237
5238** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
5239GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
5240that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
5241fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
05197f40 5242\f
3787e12e
GM
5243* Changes in Emacs 20.3
5244
5245** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
5246including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
5247it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
5248perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
5249
5250** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
5251specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
5252region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
5253further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
5254command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
5255within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
5256are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
5257region.
5258
5259In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
5260selective undo.
5261
5262** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
5263unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
5264buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
5265effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
5266Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
5267
5268The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
5269though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
5270-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
5271load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
5272
5273** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
5274no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
5275enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
5276something that most users not do.
5277
5278** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
5279operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
5280The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
5281applications.
5282
5283C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
5284pasting operations.
5285
5286** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
5287setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
5288like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
5289printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
5290`ps-printer-name'.
5291
5292** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
5293minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
5294any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
5295except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
5296incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
5297hits a new word.
5298
5299Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
5300Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
5301to be confused by TeX commands.
5302
5303You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
5304correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
5305clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
5306of various alternative replacements and actions.
5307
5308Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
5309the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
5310corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
5311alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
5312flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
5313
5314Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
5315flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
5316
5317** Changes in input method usage.
5318
5319Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
5320the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
5321respectively.
5322
5323You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
5324
5325If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
5326of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
5327
5328The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
5329that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
5330
5331 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
5332
5333 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
5334
5335 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
5336 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
5337
5338 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
5339 given in the following case:
5340 o When you are using a complex input method.
5341 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
5342
5343If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
5344input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
5345and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
5346setting it to t is helpful.
5347
5348The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
5349
5350In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
5351keys:
5352 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
5353 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
5354 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
5355These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
5356environment.
5357
5358** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
5359names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
5360minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
5361get
5362
5363 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
5364
5365which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
5366
5367Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
5368Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
5369
5370** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
5371at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
5372its owner and group.
5373
5374** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
5375Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
5376
5377** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
5378contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
5379
5380** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
5381which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
5382in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
5383by the left edge of the rectangle.
5384
5385** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
5386increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
5387C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
5388for writing keyboard macros.
5389
5390** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
5391files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
5392frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
5393the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
5394additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
5395info.
5396
5397** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
5398
5399** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
5400query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
5401contents only.
5402
5403** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
5404confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
5405the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
5406says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
5407
5408** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
5409non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
5410literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
5411
5412** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
5413now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
5414Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
5415inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
5416
5417** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
5418failure if the command produces no output.
5419
5420** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
5421manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
5422the mouse.
5423
5424** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
5425mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
5426function and variable names.
5427
5428** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
5429reading specific files. This has higher priority than
5430file-coding-system-alist.
5431
5432** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
5433t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
5434converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
5435the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
5436according to the current fontset.
5437
5438** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
5439
5440The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
5441that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
5442nonascii-insert-offset.
5443
5444For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
5445enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
5446nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
5447characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
5448
5449** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
5450an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
5451
5452** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
5453letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
5454
5455** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
5456are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
5457command keys.
5458
5459** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
5460user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
5461
5462Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
5463user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
5464all variables that have documentation.
5465
5466** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
5467shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
5468that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
5469minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
5470it should show; the default is 20.
5471
5472Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
5473the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
5474of your input.
5475
5476** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
5477all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
5478recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
5479argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
5480the customizable options which were changed since that version.
5481Newly added options are included as well.
5482
5483If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
5484then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
5485for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
5486
5487This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
5488Customize menu.
5489
5490** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
5491the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
5492
5493** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
5494buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
5495invoked.
5496
5497** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
5498that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
5499The default is 1.
5500
5501** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
5502syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
5503new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
5504(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
5505sensibly.
5506
5507** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
5508
5509** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
5510value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
5511two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
5512
5513** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
5514reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
5515for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
5516every night.
5517
5518** Desktop changes
5519
5520*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
5521the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
5522
5523*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
5524and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
5525
5526** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
5527read and post multi-lingual articles.
5528
5529** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
5530doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
5531be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
5532outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
5533the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
5534made invisible again.
5535
5536** Mail reading and sending changes
5537
5538*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
5539the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
5540changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
5541toggle.
5542
5543*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
5544now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
5545summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
5546the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
5547rmail-default-body-file.
5548
5549*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
5550longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
5551handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
5552
5553*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
5554it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
5555is evaluated to insert the signature.
5556
5557*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
5558outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
5559handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
5560putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
5561transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
5562especially interested in trying feedmail.
5563
5564feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
5565feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
5566provided by feedmail are:
5567
5568**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
5569stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
5570there is also a queue for draft messages
5571
5572**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
5573be prompted for confirmation
5574
5575**** does smart filling of address headers
5576
5577**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
5578the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
5579can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
5580
5581**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
5582the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
5583/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
5584function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
5585
5586** Dired changes
5587
5588*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
5589files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
5590
5591*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
5592run Dired on the directory name at point.
5593
5594*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
5595files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
5596for a specified regexp.
5597
5598** VC Changes
5599
5600*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
5601conveniently.
5602
5603*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
5604faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
5605Dired.
5606
5607VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
5608directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
5609listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
5610currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
5611
5612You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
5613then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
5614vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
5615control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
5616on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
5617
5618All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
5619is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
5620`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
5621the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
5622`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
5623
5624The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
5625toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
5626VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
5627`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
5628
5629Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
5630ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
5631command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
5632
5633*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
5634file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
5635session to resolve them.
5636
5637Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
5638resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
5639contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
5640uses as well).
5641
5642*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
5643command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
5644you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
5645either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
5646branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
5647If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
5648using ediff.
5649
5650** Changes in Font Lock
5651
5652*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
5653are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
5654use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
5655unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
5656compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
5657
5658** Frame name display changes
5659
5660*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
5661frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
5662raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
5663when many frames are invisible or iconified.
5664
5665*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
5666frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
5667menu.
5668
5669** Comint (subshell) changes
5670
5671*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
5672subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
5673with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
5674
5675*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
5676
5677C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
5678that is, the line after the last line you got.
5679You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
5680
5681C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
5682send the current line together with the following line, when you send
5683the following line.
5684
5685C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
5686which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
5687previously sent input.
5688
5689C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
5690it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
5691as the search string.
5692
5693*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
5694automatically in compilation-mode windows.
5695
5696** C mode changes
5697
5698*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
5699and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
5700assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
5701definition.
5702
5703*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
5704(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
5705Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
5706style is still the default however.
5707
5708*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
5709
5710*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
5711are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
5712them. They do not have key bindings by default.
5713
5714*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
5715and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
5716
5717*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
5718namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
5719
5720*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
5721makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
5722
5723*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
5724c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
5725
5726*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
5727should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
5728package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
5729variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
5730
5731** Changes to hippie-expand.
5732
5733*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
5734non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
5735which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
5736
5737*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
5738non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
5739expanding dynamically.
5740
5741*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
5742non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
5743
5744*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
5745non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
5746this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
5747expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
5748
5749*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
5750
5751** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5752
5753*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
5754bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
5755automatic key generation. This replaces variable
5756bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
5757against the first word in the title.
5758
5759*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
5760capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
5761bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
5762lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
5763lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
5764bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
5765
5766*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
5767generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
5768replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
5769bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
5770
5771** Changes in vcursor.el.
5772
5773*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
5774and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
5775variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
5776entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
5777`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
5778in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
5779
5780*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
5781Editing group once the package is loaded.
5782
5783*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
5784generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
8a33023e 5785vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior.
3787e12e
GM
5786
5787*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
5788vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
5789
5790** Ispell changes.
5791
5792*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
5793buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
5794are identified by syntax tables in effect.
5795
5796*** Generic region skipping implemented.
5797A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
5798and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
5799defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
5800include:
5801
5802 o URLs are automatically skipped
5803 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
5804
5805*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
5806
5807** Changes to RefTeX mode
5808
5809RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
5810large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
5811re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
5812section `Optimizations' in the manual.
5813
5814*** New recursive parser.
5815
5816The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
5817entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
5818recursive parser scans the individual files.
5819
5820*** Parsing only part of a document.
5821
5822Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
5823partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
5824the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
5825
5826 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
5827
5828*** Storing parsing information in a file.
5829
5830This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
5831
5832 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
5833
5834*** Using multiple selection buffers
5835
5836If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
5837for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
5838
5839 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
5840
5841*** References to external documents.
5842
5843The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
5844documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
5845documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
5846macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
5847RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
5848the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
5849The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
5850
5851*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
5852
8a33023e 5853The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
3787e12e
GM
5854and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
5855
5856Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
5857the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
5858
5859*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
5860
5861The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
5862buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
5863
5864*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
5865
5866The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
5867contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
5868`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
5869have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
5870enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
5871at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
5872more.
5873
5874*** Support for the varioref package
5875
5876The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
5877
5878*** New hooks
5879
5880Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
5881and citations are created. These hooks are
5882`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
5883`reftex-format-cite-function'.
5884
5885*** Citations outside LaTeX
5886
5887The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
5888a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
5889
5890*** Short context is no longer fontified.
5891
5892The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
5893fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
5894fontified, use
5895
5896 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
5897
5898** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
5899With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
5900the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
5901directories that contain the same file name.
5902
5903Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
5904Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
5905file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
5906Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
5907have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
5908names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
5909directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
5910directory.
5911
5912** New modes and packages
5913
5914*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
5915It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
5916it, but some do not.
5917
5918*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
5919code.
5920
5921*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
5922current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
5923around in a buffer.
5924
5925Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
5926
5927*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
5928uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
5929be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
5930established system of notation similar to Chess.
5931
5932*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
5933documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
5934guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
5935
5936*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
5937available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
5938system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
5939simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
5940functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
5941the like.
5942
5943*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
5944identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
5945
5946*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
5947within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
5948used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
5949the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
5950
5951*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
5952
5953 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
5954 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
5955 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
5956 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
5957 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
5958 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
5959 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
5960 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
5961 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
5962 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
5963 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
5964
5965 Platform-specific modes:
5966
5967 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
5968 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
5969 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
5970 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
5971 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
5972 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
5973 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
5974 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
5975 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
05197f40 5976\f
3787e12e
GM
5977* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
5978
5979** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
5980use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
5981That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
5982Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
5983
5984Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
5985you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
5986consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
5987
5988** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
5989and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
5990specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
5991searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
5992
5993** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
5994multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
5995character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
5996environment.
5997
5998** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
5999take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
6000string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
6001current input method for reading this one event.
6002
6003** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
6004now control whether to output certain characters as
6005backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
6006non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
6007characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
6008in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
05197f40 6009\f
3787e12e
GM
6010* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
6011
6012** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
6013of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
6014
6015** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
6016in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
6017always increases point by 1.
6018
6019The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
6020considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
6021
6022See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
6023
6024** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
6025Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
6026default value changed. For example,
6027
6028 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
6029 :type 'integer
6030 :group 'foo
6031 :version "20.3")
6032
6033 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
6034 :version "20.3")
6035
6036If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
6037default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
6038is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
6039`:version' in the top level group.
6040
6041This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
6042
6043** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
6044starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
6045
6046However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
6047symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
6048support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
6049to themselves.
6050
6051If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
6052this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
6053values whatever.
6054
6055** There is a new debugger command, R.
6056It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
6057in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
6058
6059** Frame-local variables.
6060
6061You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
6062the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
6063local bindings for that variable.
6064
6065These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
6066frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
6067modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
6068parameter name.
6069
6070Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
6071Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
6072active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
6073that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
6074
6075It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
6076clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
6077very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
6078through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
6079
6080** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
6081"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
6082evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
6083makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
6084See the documentation in sregex.el.
6085
6086** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
6087is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
6088parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
6089The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
6090
6091** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
6092If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
6093
6094** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
6095known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
6096define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
6097
6098** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
6099when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
6100it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
6101history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
6102
6103The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
6104return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
6105empty input.
6106
6107** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
6108for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
6109`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
6110Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
6111`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
6112
6113** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
6114echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
6115a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
6116default password to use if the user enters nothing.
6117
6118** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
6119specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
6120function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
6121place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
6122non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
6123
6124** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
6125If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
6126up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
6127end of the window, even if this requires computation.
6128
6129** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
6130which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
6131If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
6132
6133** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
6134holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
6135was directed to display this buffer.
6136
6137** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
6138with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
6139describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
6140other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
6141set-window-configuration.
6142
6143** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
6144window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
6145positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
6146windows and the choice of buffers to display.
6147
6148** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
6149override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
6150look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
6151
6152If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
6153non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
6154map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
6155
6156minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
6157and it is meant to be set by major modes.
6158
6159** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
6160except that it discards all text properties from the result.
6161
6162** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
6163USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
6164floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
6165
6166** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
6167to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
6168in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
6169it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
6170
6171** Menu changes
6172
6173*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
6174keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
6175better supported.
6176
6177The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
6178a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
6179you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
6180can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
6181then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
6182
6183*** A new format for menu items is supported.
6184
6185In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
6186 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
6187defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
6188starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
6189
6190The format is:
6191 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
6192 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
6193where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
6194string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
6195The supported properties include
6196
6197:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
6198 item is enabled.
6199:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
6200 item should appear in the menu.
6201:filter FILTER-FN
6202 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
6203 which will be REAL-BINDING.
6204 It should return a binding to use instead.
6205:keys DESCRIPTION
6206 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
f3780fe4 6207 binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
3787e12e
GM
6208 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
6209:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
6210 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
6211 keyboard binding.
6212:key-sequence nil
6213 This means that the command normally has no
6214 keyboard equivalent.
6215:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
6216:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
6217 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
6218 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
6219 value says whether this button is currently selected.
6220
6221Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
6222Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
6223
6224(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
6225
6226** New event types
6227
6228*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
6229mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
6230corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
6231which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
6232
6233 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
6234
6235where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6236same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
6237indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
6238negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
6239the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
6240forward, away from the user.
6241
6242As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6243
6244*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
6245files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
6246and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
6247filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
6248loaded into Emacs. The format is:
6249
6250 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
6251
6252where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
6253same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
6254that were dragged and dropped.
6255
6256As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
6257
6258** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
6259
6260*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
6261any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
6262to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
6263
6264*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
6265can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
6266that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
6267
6268*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
6269in Emacs 19 and before.
6270
6271The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
6272The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
6273
6274*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
6275buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
6276unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
6277representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
6278
6279This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
6280as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
6281viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
6282one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
6283will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
6284
6285This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
6286representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
6287(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
6288consistent with the new representation.
6289
6290*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
6291representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
6292about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
6293however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6294
6295The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
6296nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
6297using the table nonascii-translation-table.
6298
6299*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
6300representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
6301representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
6302
6303The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
6304loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
6305is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
6306
6307*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6308which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
6309
6310*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
6311which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
6312
6313*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
6314portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
6315so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
6316You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
6317
6318*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
6319it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
6320
6321*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
6322convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
6323buffer or string being searched.
6324
6325One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
6326[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
6327searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
6328searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
6329obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
6330you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
6331expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
6332
6333*** Structure of coding system changed.
6334
6335All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
6336by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
6337which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
6338as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
6339vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
6340your own alias name of a coding system by the function
6341define-coding-system-alias.
6342
6343The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
6344the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
6345access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
6346pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
6347character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
6348safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
6349'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
6350`iso-8859-1'.
6351
6352Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
6353The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
6354coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
6355(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
6356
6357Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
6358also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
6359are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
6360the other character sets and read it back correctly.
6361
6362*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
6363proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
6364This function requires a user interaction.
6365
6366*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
6367find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
6368select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
6369systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
6370a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
6371select-safe-coding-system.
6372
6373*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
6374decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
6375last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
6376was done.
6377
6378*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
6379used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
6380coding systems used by some specific language environment.
6381
6382*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
6383return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
6384characters are found, they now return a list of single element
6385`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
6386
6387*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
6388coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
6389coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
6390converted.
6391
6392*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
6393coding system for communicating with other X clients.
6394
6395*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
6396character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
6397character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
6398each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
6399either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
6400range of characters.
6401
6402*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
6403Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
6404
6405*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
6406in the current buffer at position POS.
6407
6408*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
6409input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
6410function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
6411character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
6412event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
6413binding input-method-function to nil.
6414
6415The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
6416method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
6417input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
6418the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
6419not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
6420
6421The input method function is not called when reading the second and
6422subsequent events of a key sequence.
6423
6424*** You can customize any language environment by using
6425set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
6426
6427The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
6428customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
6429instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
6430environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
6431exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
05197f40 6432\f
3787e12e
GM
6433* Changes in Emacs 20.1
6434
6435** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
6436options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
6437at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
6438tree structure.
6439
6440M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
6441user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
6442
6443With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
6444session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
6445in your .emacs file.)
6446
6447** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
6448You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
6449
6450** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
6451This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
6452
6453** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
6454immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
6455kills the region.
6456
6457The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
6458delete the character before point, as usual.
6459
6460** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
6461on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
6462by setting search-highlight to nil.)
6463
6464** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
6465insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
6466the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
6467onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
6468history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
6469past.)
6470
6471** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
6472This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
6473in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
6474TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
6475makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
6476
6477As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
6478and is an alias for it.
6479
6480If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
6481use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
6482
6483** Scrolling changes
6484
6485*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
6486position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
6487
6488In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
6489on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
6490where it started.
6491
6492*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
6493move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
6494screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
6495does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
6496
6497*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
6498top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
6499comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
6500recenters the window.
6501
6502** International character set support (MULE)
6503
6504Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
6505including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
6506Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
6507Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
6508features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
6509MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
6510
6511Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
6512coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
6513character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
6514variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
6515into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
6516
6517Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
6518generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
6519supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
6520language, to make it possible to type them.
6521
6522The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
6523character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
6524
6525The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
6526to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
6527
6528You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
6529
6530 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
6531
6532Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
6533characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
6534argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
6535already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
6536characters for their work until they want to change.
6537
6538*** Input methods
6539
6540An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
6541specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
6542has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
6543the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
6544support several input methods.
6545
6546The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
6547another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
6548work.
6549
6550A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
6551characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
6552composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
6553consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
6554sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
6555letter.
6556
6557The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
6558by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
6559First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
6560marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
6561mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
6562
6563None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
6564they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
6565phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
6566converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
6567
6568Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
6569word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
6570typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
6571the first guess is wrong.
6572
6573*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
6574turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
6575
6576If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
6577byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
6578they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
6579the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
6580
6581However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
6582use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
6583includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
6584translate automatically to and from either one.
6585
6586*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
6587
6588Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
6589file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
6590sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
6591what you want.
6592
6593If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
6594example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
6595system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
6596multibyte characters in that buffer.
6597
6598If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
6599character conversion as well.
6600
6601*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
6602
6603A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
6604Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
6605requires using many fonts.
6606
6607Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
6608collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
6609
6610A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
6611the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
6612have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
6613you would use a font.
6614
6615If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
6616specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
6617display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
6618
6619The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
6620(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
6621characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
6622or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
6623and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
6624
6625*** Defining fontsets.
6626
6627Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
6628chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
6629with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
6630
6631Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
6632of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
6633`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
6634standard fontset are created automatically.
6635
6636If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
6637argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
6638FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
6639with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
6640name is `fontset-startup'.
6641
6642Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
6643The resource value should have this form:
6644 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
6645FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
6646 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
6647 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
6648 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
6649The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
6650of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
0969bd6a
EZ
6651CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME
6652should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
3787e12e
GM
6653
6654Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
6655last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
6656You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
6657
6658For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
6659font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
6660following resource,
6661 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
6662the font for ASCII is generated as below:
6663 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
6664Here is the substitution rule:
6665 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
6666 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
6667 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
6668 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
6669 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
6670
6671The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
6672fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
6673that function explicitly to create a fontset.
6674
6675With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
6676like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
6677name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
6678fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
6679fontsets.
6680
6681*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
6682defaults for a particular choice of language.
6683
6684Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
6685method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
6686visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
6687already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
6688language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
6689system for new files that you create.
6690
6691It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
6692set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
6693whole Emacs session.
6694
6695For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
6696chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
6697with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
6698
6699*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
6700specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
6701specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
6702the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
6703coding systems that Emacs supports.
6704
6705*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
6706lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
6707This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
6708After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
6709is used for *the immediately following command*.
6710
6711So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
6712write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
6713
6714If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
6715then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
6716
6717For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
6718visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
6719
6720*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
6721construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
6722to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
6723specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
6724of the file.
6725
6726*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
6727the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
6728code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
6729translated into that character code.
6730
6731This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
6732various countries to support the languages of those countries.
6733
6734By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
6735
6736*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
6737the coding system for keyboard input.
6738
6739Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
6740with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
6741some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
6742
6743By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
6744
6745Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
6746input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
6747translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
6748to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
6749designed to work with terminals.
6750
6751*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
6752specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
6753This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
6754has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
6755translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
6756in the corresponding buffer.
6757
6758By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
6759
6760*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
6761to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
6762It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
6763
6764*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
6765an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
6766command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
6767want to use.
6768
6769C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
6770method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
6771
6772*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
6773layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
6774remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
6775which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
6776
6777*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
6778the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
6779related information.
6780
6781*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
6782HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
6783scripts.
6784
6785*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
6786information about the support for a particular language.
6787You specify the language as an argument.
6788
6789*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
6790the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
6791first dash.
6792
6793A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
6794(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
6795whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
67961 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
6797
6798 A alternativnyj (Russian)
6799 B big5 (Chinese)
6800 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
6801 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
6802 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
6803 E euc-japan (Japanese)
6804 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6805 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
6806 K euc-korea (Korean)
6807 R koi8 (Russian)
6808 Q tibetan
6809 S shift_jis (Japanese)
6810 T lao
6811 T tis620 (Thai)
6812 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
6813 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
6814 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
6815 v viqr (Vietnamese)
6816 z hz (Chinese)
6817
6818When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
6819two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
6820coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
6821keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
6822
6823*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
6824conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
6825
6826When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
6827into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
6828rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
6829Rmail files themselves.
6830
6831*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
6832conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
6833
6834Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
6835for sending mail:
6836
6837- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
6838- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
6839- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
6840 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
6841- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
6842
6843*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
6844to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
6845Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
6846translations.
6847
6848** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
6849of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
6850insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
6851without any conversion.
6852
6853** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
6854You can now specify any number of octal digits.
6855RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
6856any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
6857
6858** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
6859functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
6860
6861Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
6862Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
6863
6864Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
6865mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
6866
6867** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
6868complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
6869in the buffer before point.
6870
6871With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
6872symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
6873you are using.
6874
6875With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
6876just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
6877
6878** File locking works with NFS now.
6879
6880The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
6881in the same directory as FILENAME.
6882
6883This means that collision detection between two different machines now
6884works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
6885can become a bottleneck.
6886
6887The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
6888does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
6889create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
6890file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
6891rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
6892so useful that the change is worth while.
6893
6894When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
6895are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
6896collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
6897tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
6898
6899** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
6900it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
6901show-paren-mode.
6902
6903** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
6904selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
6905delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
6906
6907** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
6908within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
6909complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
6910
6911** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
6912it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
6913set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
6914
6915** Changes in View mode.
6916
6917*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
6918Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
6919
6920*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
6921view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
6922
6923*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
6924previous state.
6925
6926*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
6927scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
6928
6929*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
6930non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
6931not just the selected window.
6932
6933*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
6934read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
6935turns View mode on or off.
6936
6937*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
6938how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
6939delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
6940
6941** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
6942now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
6943
6944** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
6945has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
6946presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
6947which version to compare with.
6948
6949** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
6950blocks if a match is inside the block.
6951
6952The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
6953is outside the block. By customizing the variable
6954isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
6955shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
6956
6957By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
6958of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
6959blocks, all of them or none.
6960
6961** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
6962current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
6963confirmation first.
6964
6965** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
6966now changes the major mode according to that file name.
6967However, the mode will not be changed if
6968(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
6969(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
6970 not suitable for ordinary files, or
6971(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
6972
6973This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
6974
6975However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
6976these commands do not change the major mode.
6977
6978** M-x occur changes.
6979
6980*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
6981it performs a case-sensitive search.
6982
6983*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
6984if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
6985using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
6986
6987** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
6988in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
6989window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
6990that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
6991buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
6992
6993** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
6994after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
6995appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
6996come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
6997
6998** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6999selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
7000buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
7001
7002** Outline mode changes.
7003
7004*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
7005
7006*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
7007
7008** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
7009you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
7010Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
7011was already active.
7012
7013The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
7014unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
7015get confused by it.
7016
7017If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
7018set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
7019
7020** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
7021
7022*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7023conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
7024character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
7025including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
7026
7027The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
7028mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
7029copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
7030
7031*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
7032are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
7033values.
7034
7035`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
7036case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
7037`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
7038case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
7039
7040** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
7041certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
7042can be. The default value is 30.
7043
7044** Changes in Mail mode.
7045
7046*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
7047Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
7048composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
7049`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
7050`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
7051behavior.
7052
7053C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
7054compose-mail-other-frame.
7055
7056*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
7057the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
7058replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
7059buffer that shows the original message.
7060
7061*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
7062with separator lines around the contents.
7063
7064*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
7065in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
7066definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
7067need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
7068
7069*** New features in the mail-complete command.
7070
7071**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
7072for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
7073controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
7074Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
7075
7076**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
7077to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
7078/etc/passwd.
7079
7080**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
7081to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
7082/etc/passwd.
7083
7084** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
7085special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
7086directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
7087reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
7088
7089Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
7090when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
7091be taken to be magic.
7092
7093** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
7094files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
7095available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
7096
7097M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
7098(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
7099
7100** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
7101suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
7102
7103In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
7104
7105new key dired.el binding old key
7106------- ---------------- -------
7107 * c dired-change-marks c
7108 * m dired-mark m
7109 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
7110 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
7111 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
7112 * u dired-unmark u
7113 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
7114 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
7115 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
7116 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
7117 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
7118 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
7119
7120** Rmail changes.
7121
7122*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
7123saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
7124chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
7125each time you run it.
7126
7127*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
7128whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
7129
7130*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
7131messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
7132means to move in the opposite direction.
7133
7134*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
7135you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
7136
7137*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
7138just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
7139It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
7140can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
7141for output.
7142
7143** Gnus changes.
7144
7145*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
7146
7147*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
7148Gnus.
7149
7150*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
7151`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
7152
7153*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
7154article mode line.
7155
7156*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
7157
7158*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
7159
7160(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
7161
7162*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
7163are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
7164`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
7165
7166*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
7167
7168*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
7169
7170*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
7171See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
7172
7173*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
7174Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
7175used to pick articles.
7176
7177*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
7178another have been added.
7179
7180 `M-x gnus-change-server'
7181
7182*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
7183generating lines in buffers.
7184
7185*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
7186`M-C-_'.
7187
7188*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
7189
7190*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
7191
7192 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
7193
7194*** Scores can be decayed.
7195
7196 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
7197
7198*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
7199Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
7200
7201*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
7202the native server.
7203
7204 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
7205
7206*** A new command for reading collections of documents
7207(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
7208
7209*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
7210
7211*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
7212even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
7213
7214*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
7215(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
7216
7217 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
7218 a group.
7219
7220*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
7221sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
7222
7223 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
7224
7225*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
7226
7227 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
7228
7229*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
7230
7231 Use the `Y c' command.
7232
7233*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
7234
7235*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
7236
7237 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
7238
7239*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
7240from incoming mail before saving the mail.
7241
7242 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
7243
7244*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
7245
7246*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
7247the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
7248
7249 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
7250
7251Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
7252and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
7253from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
7254hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
7255this issue.)
7256
7257Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
7258automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
7259particular news group. This can be done by:
7260
7261 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
7262
7263Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
7264of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
7265"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
7266system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
7267for reading and posting).
7268
7269CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
7270 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
7271Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
7272newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
7273there.
7274
7275Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
7276default. Here are some of these default settings:
7277
7278 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
7279 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
7280 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
7281 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
7282 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
7283
7284When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
7285the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
7286
7287** CC mode changes.
7288
7289*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
7290code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
7291values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
7292this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
7293Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
7294loaded.
7295
7296If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
7297Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
7298style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
7299share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
7300c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
7301must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
7302
7303*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
7304of the current buffer.
7305
7306*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
7307it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
7308of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
7309
7310*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
7311style that the Python developers like.
7312
7313*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
7314This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
7315just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
7316
7317** VC Changes [new]
7318
9614842d 7319*** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
3787e12e
GM
7320name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
7321directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
7322
7323This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
7324master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
7325developers.
7326
7327You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
7328RET in a buffer visiting that file.
7329
7330*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
7331other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
7332writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
7333calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
7334
7335*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
7336version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
7337
7338** Calendar changes.
7339
9614842d
JW
7340*** A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or
7341subclasses of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow
7342you do this for the year of the selected date, or the
7343following/previous years.
7344
7345*** There is now support for the Baha'i calendar system. Use `pb' in
7346the *Calendar* buffer to display the current Baha'i date. The Baha'i
7347calendar, or "Badi calendar" is a system of 19 months with 19 days
7348each, and 4 intercalary days (5 during a Gregorian leap year). The
7349calendar begins May 23, 1844, with each of the months named after a
7350supposed attribute of God.
3787e12e
GM
7351
7352** ps-print changes
7353
2261f14e
GM
7354There are some new user variables and subgroups for customizing the page
7355layout.
3787e12e 7356
2261f14e 7357*** Headers & Footers (subgroup)
3787e12e 7358
2261f14e
GM
7359Some printer systems print a header page and force the first page to
7360be printed on the back of the header page when using duplex. If your
7361printer system has this behavior, set variable
7362`ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' to t.
3787e12e 7363
2261f14e
GM
7364If variable `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' is non-nil, it prints a
7365blank page as the very first printed page. So, it behaves as if the
a5d03456 7366very first character of buffer (or region) were a form feed ^L (\014).
3787e12e 7367
2261f14e
GM
7368The variable `ps-spool-config' specifies who is responsible for
7369setting duplex mode and page size. Valid values are:
3787e12e 7370
2261f14e
GM
7371 lpr-switches duplex and page size are configured by `ps-lpr-switches'.
7372 Don't forget to set `ps-lpr-switches' to select duplex
7373 printing for your printer.
3787e12e 7374
2261f14e
GM
7375 setpagedevice duplex and page size are configured by ps-print using the
7376 setpagedevice PostScript operator.
3787e12e 7377
2261f14e
GM
7378 nil duplex and page size are configured by ps-print *not* using
7379 the setpagedevice PostScript operator.
3787e12e 7380
2261f14e
GM
7381The variable `ps-spool-tumble' specifies how the page images on
7382opposite sides of a sheet are oriented with respect to each other. If
7383`ps-spool-tumble' is nil, ps-print produces output suitable for
7384bindings on the left or right. If `ps-spool-tumble' is non-nil,
7385ps-print produces output suitable for bindings at the top or bottom.
7386This variable takes effect only if `ps-spool-duplex' is non-nil.
7387The default value is nil.
3787e12e 7388
2261f14e
GM
7389The variable `ps-header-frame-alist' specifies a header frame
7390properties alist. Valid frame properties are:
3787e12e 7391
2261f14e
GM
7392 fore-color Specify the foreground frame color.
7393 Value should be a float number between 0.0 (black
7394 color) and 1.0 (white color), or a string which is a
7395 color name, or a list of 3 float numbers which
7396 correspond to the Red Green Blue color scale, each
7397 float number between 0.0 (dark color) and 1.0 (bright
7398 color). The default is 0 ("black").
3787e12e 7399
2261f14e
GM
7400 back-color Specify the background frame color (similar to fore-color).
7401 The default is 0.9 ("gray90").
7402
7403 shadow-color Specify the shadow color (similar to fore-color).
7404 The default is 0 ("black").
7405
7406 border-color Specify the border color (similar to fore-color).
7407 The default is 0 ("black").
7408
7409 border-width Specify the border width.
7410 The default is 0.4.
7411
7412Any other property is ignored.
7413
7414Don't change this alist directly; instead use Custom, or the
7415`ps-value', `ps-get', `ps-put' and `ps-del' functions (see there for
7416documentation).
7417
7418Ps-print can also print footers. The footer variables are:
7419`ps-print-footer', `ps-footer-offset', `ps-print-footer-frame',
7420`ps-footer-font-family', `ps-footer-font-size', `ps-footer-line-pad',
7421`ps-footer-lines', `ps-left-footer', `ps-right-footer' and
7422`ps-footer-frame-alist'. These variables are similar to those
7423controlling headers.
3787e12e 7424
2261f14e
GM
7425*** Color management (subgroup)
7426
7427If `ps-print-color-p' is non-nil, the buffer's text will be printed in
7428color.
7429
7430*** Face Management (subgroup)
3787e12e 7431
2261f14e
GM
7432If you need to print without worrying about face background colors,
7433set the variable `ps-use-face-background' which specifies if face
7434background should be used. Valid values are:
7435
7436 t always use face background color.
7437 nil never use face background color.
7438 (face...) list of faces whose background color will be used.
7439
7440*** N-up printing (subgroup)
7441
7442The variable `ps-n-up-printing' specifies the number of pages per
7443sheet of paper.
7444
7445The variable `ps-n-up-margin' specifies the margin in points (pt)
7446between the sheet border and the n-up printing.
7447
7448If variable `ps-n-up-border-p' is non-nil, a border is drawn around
7449each page.
7450
7451The variable `ps-n-up-filling' specifies how the page matrix is filled
7452on each sheet of paper. Following are the valid values for
7453`ps-n-up-filling' with a filling example using a 3x4 page matrix:
7454
7455 `left-top' 1 2 3 4 `left-bottom' 9 10 11 12
7456 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
7457 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4
3787e12e 7458
2261f14e
GM
7459 `right-top' 4 3 2 1 `right-bottom' 12 11 10 9
7460 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
7461 12 11 10 9 4 3 2 1
7462
7463 `top-left' 1 4 7 10 `bottom-left' 3 6 9 12
7464 2 5 8 11 2 5 8 11
7465 3 6 9 12 1 4 7 10
7466
7467 `top-right' 10 7 4 1 `bottom-right' 12 9 6 3
7468 11 8 5 2 11 8 5 2
7469 12 9 6 3 10 7 4 1
3787e12e 7470
2261f14e
GM
7471Any other value is treated as `left-top'.
7472
7473*** Zebra stripes (subgroup)
3787e12e 7474
2261f14e
GM
7475The variable `ps-zebra-color' controls the zebra stripes grayscale or
7476RGB color.
7477
7478The variable `ps-zebra-stripe-follow' specifies how zebra stripes
7479continue on next page. Visually, valid values are (the character `+'
7480to the right of each column indicates that a line is printed):
7481
7482 `nil' `follow' `full' `full-follow'
7483 Current Page -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
7484 1 XXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXX + 1 XXXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7485 2 XXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXX + 2 XXXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7486 3 XXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXX + 3 XXXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7487 4 + 4 + 4 + 4 +
7488 5 + 5 + 5 + 5 +
7489 6 + 6 + 6 + 6 +
7490 7 XXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXX + 7 XXXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7491 8 XXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXX + 8 XXXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7492 9 XXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXX + 9 XXXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7493 10 + 10 +
7494 11 + 11 +
7495 -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
7496 Next Page -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
7497 12 XXXXX + 12 + 10 XXXXXX + 10 +
7498 13 XXXXX + 13 XXXXXXXX + 11 XXXXXX + 11 +
7499 14 XXXXX + 14 XXXXXXXX + 12 XXXXXX + 12 +
7500 15 + 15 XXXXXXXX + 13 + 13 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7501 16 + 16 + 14 + 14 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7502 17 + 17 + 15 + 15 XXXXXXXXXXXXX +
7503 18 XXXXX + 18 + 16 XXXXXX + 16 +
7504 19 XXXXX + 19 XXXXXXXX + 17 XXXXXX + 17 +
7505 20 XXXXX + 20 XXXXXXXX + 18 XXXXXX + 18 +
7506 21 + 21 XXXXXXXX +
7507 22 + 22 +
7508 -------- ----------- --------- ----------------
7509
7510Any other value is treated as `nil'.
7511
7512
7513*** Printer management (subgroup)
7514
7515The variable `ps-printer-name-option' determines the option used by
7516some utilities to indicate the printer name; it's used only when
7517`ps-printer-name' is a non-empty string. If you're using the lpr
7518utility to print, for example, `ps-printer-name-option' should be set
7519to "-P".
7520
7521The variable `ps-manual-feed' indicates if the printer requires manual
7522paper feeding. If it's nil, automatic feeding takes place. If it's
7523non-nil, manual feeding takes place.
7524
7525The variable `ps-end-with-control-d' specifies whether C-d (\x04)
7526should be inserted at end of the generated PostScript. Non-nil means
7527do so.
7528
7529*** Page settings (subgroup)
7530
7531If variable `ps-warn-paper-type' is nil, it's *not* treated as an
7532error if the PostScript printer doesn't have a paper with the size
7533indicated by `ps-paper-type'; the default paper size will be used
7534instead. If `ps-warn-paper-type' is non-nil, an error is signaled if
7535the PostScript printer doesn't support a paper with the size indicated
7536by `ps-paper-type'. This is used when `ps-spool-config' is set to
7537`setpagedevice'.
7538
7539The variable `ps-print-upside-down' determines the orientation for
7540printing pages: nil means `normal' printing, non-nil means
7541`upside-down' printing (that is, the page is rotated by 180 degrees).
7542
7543The variable `ps-selected-pages' specifies which pages to print. If
7544it's nil, all pages are printed. If it's a list, list elements may be
7545integers specifying a single page to print, or cons cells (FROM . TO)
7546specifying to print from page FROM to TO. Invalid list elements, that
7547is integers smaller than one, or elements whose FROM is greater than
7548its TO, are ignored.
7549
7550The variable `ps-even-or-odd-pages' specifies how to print even/odd
7551pages. Valid values are:
7552
7553 nil print all pages.
7554
7555 `even-page' print only even pages.
7556
7557 `odd-page' print only odd pages.
7558
7559 `even-sheet' print only even sheets.
7560 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like
7561 `even-page', but for values greater than 1, it'll
7562 print only the even sheet of paper.
7563
7564 `odd-sheet' print only odd sheets.
7565 That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like
7566 `odd-page'; but for values greater than 1, it'll print
7567 only the odd sheet of paper.
7568
7569Any other value is treated as nil.
7570
7571If you set `ps-selected-pages' (see there for documentation), pages
7572are filtered by `ps-selected-pages', and then by
7573`ps-even-or-odd-pages'. For example, if we have:
7574
7575 (setq ps-selected-pages '(1 4 (6 . 10) (12 . 16) 20))
7576
7577and we combine this with `ps-even-or-odd-pages' and
7578`ps-n-up-printing', we get:
7579
7580`ps-n-up-printing' = 1:
7581 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED
7582 nil 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20
7583 even-page 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20
7584 odd-page 1, 7, 9, 13, 15
7585 even-sheet 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20
7586 odd-sheet 1, 7, 9, 13, 15
7587
7588`ps-n-up-printing' = 2:
7589 `ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED
7590 nil 1/4, 6/7, 8/9, 10/12, 13/14, 15/16, 20
7591 even-page 4/6, 8/10, 12/14, 16/20
7592 odd-page 1/7, 9/13, 15
7593 even-sheet 6/7, 10/12, 15/16
7594 odd-sheet 1/4, 8/9, 13/14, 20
7595
7596*** Miscellany (subgroup)
7597
7598The variable `ps-error-handler-message' specifies where error handler
7599messages should be sent.
7600
7601It is also possible to add a user-defined PostScript prologue code in
7602front of all generated prologue code by setting the variable
7603`ps-user-defined-prologue'.
7604
7605The variable `ps-line-number-font' specifies the font for line numbers.
7606
7607The variable `ps-line-number-font-size' specifies the font size in
7608points for line numbers.
7609
7610The variable `ps-line-number-color' specifies the color for line
7611numbers. See `ps-zebra-color' for documentation.
7612
7613The variable `ps-line-number-step' specifies the interval in which
7614line numbers are printed. For example, if `ps-line-number-step' is set
7615to 2, the printing will look like:
7616
7617 1 one line
7618 one line
7619 3 one line
7620 one line
7621 5 one line
7622 one line
7623 ...
7624
7625Valid values are:
7626
7627integer an integer specifying the interval in which line numbers are
7628 printed. If it's smaller than or equal to zero, 1
7629 is used.
7630
7631`zebra' specifies that only the line number of the first line in a
7632 zebra stripe is to be printed.
7633
7634Any other value is treated as `zebra'.
7635
7636The variable `ps-line-number-start' specifies the starting point in
7637the interval given by `ps-line-number-step'. For example, if
7638`ps-line-number-step' is set to 3, and `ps-line-number-start' is set to
76393, the output will look like:
7640
7641 one line
7642 one line
7643 3 one line
7644 one line
7645 one line
7646 6 one line
7647 one line
7648 one line
7649 9 one line
7650 one line
7651 ...
7652
7653The variable `ps-postscript-code-directory' specifies the directory
7654where the PostScript prologue file used by ps-print is found.
7655
7656The variable `ps-line-spacing' determines the line spacing in points,
7657for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to
7658`ps-font-size').
7659
7660The variable `ps-paragraph-spacing' determines the paragraph spacing,
7661in points, for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to
7662`ps-font-size').
7663
7664The variable `ps-paragraph-regexp' specifies the paragraph delimiter.
7665
7666The variable `ps-begin-cut-regexp' and `ps-end-cut-regexp' specify the
7667start and end of a region to cut out when printing.
3787e12e
GM
7668
7669** hideshow changes.
7670
7671*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
7672C++, ; for lisp).
7673
7674*** Support for java-mode added.
7675
7676*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
7677in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
7678
f3780fe4 7679*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at
3787e12e
GM
7680the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
7681way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
7682
7683*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
7684robust and a lot faster.
7685
7686*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
7687
7688*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
7689to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
7690documentation for more details.
7691
7692** Changes in Enriched mode.
7693
7694*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
7695filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
7696of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
7697use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
7698the next time unless the fill-column is different.
7699
7700*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
7701distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
7702as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
7703as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
7704
7705** Font Lock mode
7706
7707*** Custom support
7708
7709The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
7710font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
7711faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
7712group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
7713your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
7714consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
7715
7716You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
7717
7718*** Maximum decoration
7719
7720Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
7721default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
7722of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
7723supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
7724to get the old behavior.
7725
7726*** New support
7727
7728Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
7729
7730Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
7731support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
7732
7733*** Configurable support
7734
7735Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
7736additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
7737c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
7738java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
7739list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
7740of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
7741convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
7742
7743Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
7744way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
7745it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
7746
7747*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
7748
7749You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
7750highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
7751for any mode.
7752
7753For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
7754
7755 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
7756
7757in your ~/.emacs.
7758
7759*** New faces
7760
7761Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
7762font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
7763distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
7764to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
7765
7766*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
7767
7768The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
7769cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
7770same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
7771
7772*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
7773
7774The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
7775according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
7776the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
7777non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
7778refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
7779the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
7780Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
7781
7782This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
7783For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
7784this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
7785refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
7786containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
7787the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
7788
7789As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
7790
7791Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
7792Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
7793Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
7794new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
7795
7796If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
7797settings.
7798
7799** Ada mode changes.
7800
7801*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
7802If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
7803procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
7804you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
7805stubs.
7806
7807*** There are two new commands:
7808 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
7809 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
7810
7811The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
7812`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
7813`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
7814
7815*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
7816is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
7817Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
7818
7819*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
7820formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
7821places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
7822space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
7823
7824** Scheme mode changes.
7825
7826*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
7827mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
7828for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
7829with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
7830have any effect.
7831
7832If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
7833still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
7834scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
7835variables as buffer-local variables.
7836
7837*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
7838Use M-x dsssl-mode.
7839
7840** Changes to the emacsclient program
7841
7842*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
7843USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
7844associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
7845can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
7846
7847*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
7848it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
7849buffer in Emacs.
7850
7851*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
7852use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
7853ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
7854option takes precedence.
7855
7856** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
7857constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
7858(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
7859
7860** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
7861which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
7862the current defun.
7863
7864** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
7865following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
7866
7867** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
7868and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
7869necessary).
7870
7871** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
7872if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
7873these register values no longer become completely useless.
7874If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
7875asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
7876it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
7877
7878** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
7879example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
7880be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
7881you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
7882
7883You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
7884variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
7885file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
7886revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
7887only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
7888
7889** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
7890since it applies only to the current frame.
7891
7892** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
7893file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
7894and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
7895
7896This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
7897multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
7898variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
7899tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
7900instead of just the file you are editing.
7901
7902** RefTeX mode
7903
7904RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
7905and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
7906different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
7907multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
7908turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
7909
7910C-c ( reftex-label
7911 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
7912 knows which kind of label is needed.
7913
7914C-c ) reftex-reference
7915 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
7916 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
7917
7918C-c [ reftex-citation
7919 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
7920 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
7921
7922C-c & reftex-view-crossref
7923 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
7924
7925C-c = reftex-toc
7926 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
7927 can quickly jump to every section.
7928
7929Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
7930commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
7931Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
7932reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
7933C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
7934
7935** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7936
7937*** Info documentation is now available.
7938
7939*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
7940both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
7941
7942*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
7943bibtex-user-optional-fields.
7944
7945*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
7946(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
7947
7948*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
7949entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
7950appropriate functions.
7951
7952*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
7953entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
7954
7955*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
7956been cleaned.
7957
7958*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
7959bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
7960
7961*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
7962shall be delimited.
7963
7964*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
7965bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
7966bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
7967
7968*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
7969field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
7970prefixed with `ALT'.
7971
7972*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
7973bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
7974formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
7975documentation).
7976
7977*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
7978documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
7979for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
7980
7981*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
7982comma should be inserted at end of last field.
7983
7984*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
7985alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
7986signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
7987
7988*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
7989
7990*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
7991
7992*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
7993from alien sources.
7994
7995*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
7996to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
7997crossref entries.
7998
7999*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
8000region.
8001
8002*** Added support for imenu.
8003
8004*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
8005of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
8006`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
8007`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
8008
8009*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
8010from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
8011
8012** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
8013
8014** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
8015
8016** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
8017functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
8018Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
8019as an argument.
8020
8021When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
8022and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
8023
8024** browse-url changes
8025
8026*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
8027Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
8028(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
8029non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
8030customization variables.
8031
8032*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
8033
8034*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
8035lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
8036(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
8037
8038** Changes in Ediff
8039
8040*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
8041pops up the Info file for this command.
8042
8043*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
8044the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
8045merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
8046directories).
8047
8048*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
8049and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
8050files in the same directory.
8051
8052*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
8053The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
8054related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
8055
8056** Changes in Viper
8057
8058*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
8059*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
8060 instead of vip-.
8061*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
8062*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
8063Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
8064*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
8065*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
8066*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
8067color when Viper is in insert state.
8068*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
8069Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
8070viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
8071
8072** Etags changes.
8073
8074*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
8075default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
8076Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
8077variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
8078not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
8079
8080*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
8081
8082*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
8083constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
8084
8085*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
8086recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
8087In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
8088
8089*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
8090C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
8091recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
8092methods and protocols.
8093
8094*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
8095.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
8096column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
8097paragraph name.
8098
8099*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
8100an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
8101at least M times and as many as N times.
8102
8103** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
8104in files has changed slightly.
8105
8106With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
8107time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
8108This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
8109with old time-stamp-format values.
8110
8111In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
8112(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
8113This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
8114reasons.
8115
8116In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
8117natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
8118fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
8119(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
8120time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
8121specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
8122
8123Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
8124case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
8125truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
8126
8127The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
8128being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
8129future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
8130recommended now will continue to work then.
8131
8132See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
8133details.
8134
8135** There are some additional major modes:
8136
8137dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
8138m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
8139meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
8140
8141** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
8142copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
8143into Emacs.
8144
8145** New Lisp packages include:
8146
8147*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
8148
8149*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
8150be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
8151
8152*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
8153
8154*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
8155in shell buffers.
8156
8157*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
8158See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
8159and `elint-defun'.
8160
8161*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
8162meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
8163ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
8164strings or comments.
8165
8166These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
8167abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
8168you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
8169insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
8170at these points.
8171
8172*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
8173can visit them by short forms of their names.
8174
8175*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
8176Emacs Lisp function at point.
8177
8178*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
8179
8180*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
8181switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
8182
8183*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
8184
8185*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
8186
8187*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
8188
8189*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
8190from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
8191
8192*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
8193You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
8194inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
8195original place after inserting the copy.
8196
8197*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
8198on the buffer.
8199
8200You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
8201velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
8202(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
8203
8204Enable mouse-drag with:
8205 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
8206-or-
8207 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
8208
8209*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
8210mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
8211
8212*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
8213It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
8214
8215*** ogonek
8216
8217The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
8218Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
8219platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
8220TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
8221ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
8222prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
8223instance) and vice versa.
8224
8225To use this package load it using
8226 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
8227Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
8228 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
8229 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
8230The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
8231ways of customization in `.emacs'.
8232
8233*** Interface to ph.
8234
8235Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
8236
8237The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
8238services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
8239these servers.
8240
8241*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
8242
8243*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
8244You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
8245while the real cursor does not move.
8246
8247*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
8248for visiting your favorite web sites.
8249
8250*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
8251so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
8252
8253** movemail change
8254
8255Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
8256mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
8257supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
8258user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
8259
8260This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
05197f40 8261\f
3787e12e
GM
8262* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
8263
8264** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
8265
8266Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
8267end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
8268Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
8269file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
8270file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
8271
8272To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
8273C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
8274coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
8275specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
8276LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
8277save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
05197f40 8278\f
3787e12e
GM
8279* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
8280
8281** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
8282Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
8283vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
8284Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
8285
8286** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
8287to start with w32- instead of win32-.
8288
8289In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
8290don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
8291"win".
8292
8293** Basic Lisp changes
8294
8295*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
8296evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
8297
8298*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
8299be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
8300or by the user.
8301
8302The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
8303
8304*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
8305
8306(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
8307(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
8308
8309*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
8310usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
8311its argument.
8312
8313*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
8314
8315*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
8316
8317*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
8318
8319*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
8320error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
8321include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
8322`format' function.
8323
8324*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
8325or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
8326whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
8327
8328*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
8329either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
8330adding one of these suffixes.
8331
8332*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
8333which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
8334If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
8335
8336We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
8337because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
8338
8339*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
8340
8341*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
8342You must load the `cl' library to define it.
8343
8344*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
8345conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
8346
8347 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
8348
8349BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
8350BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
8351
8352*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
8353choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
8354restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
8355works using `save-current-buffer'.
8356
8357*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
8358write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
8359of the last form.
8360
8361*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
8362which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
8363last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
8364as the last form.
8365
8366*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
8367characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
8368matches.
8369
8370For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
8371
8372*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
8373with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
8374Then it returns that string.
8375
8376For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
8377
8378(with-output-to-string
8379 (princ "The buffer is ")
8380 (princ (buffer-name)))
8381
8382returns "The buffer is foo".
8383
8384** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
8385is non-nil.
8386
8387These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
8388buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
8389characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
8390
8391*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
8392a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
8393
8394Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
8395character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
8396Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
8397position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
8398characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
8399 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
8400
8401ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
8402Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
8403non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
8404characters".
8405
8406The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
8407through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
8408"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
8409range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
8410leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
8411
8412*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
8413(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
8414multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
8415character, which may be more than one buffer position.
8416
8417This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
8418always one buffer position, need to be changed.
8419
8420However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
8421
8422*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
8423because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
8424have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
8425the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
8426guaranteed.
8427
8428*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
8429between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
8430character).
8431
8432When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
8433
8434 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
8435 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
8436 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
8437 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
8438 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
8439
8440*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
8441
8442*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
8443`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
8444more than the number of characters.
8445
8446You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
8447it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
8448\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
8449is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
8450follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
8451newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
8452
8453*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
8454and returns a string containing those characters.
8455
8456*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
8457(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
8458counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
8459character, sref signals an error.
8460
8461*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
8462in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
8463string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
8464
8465*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
8466in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
8467region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
8468
8469*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
8470the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
8471to a vector of the characters in it.
8472
8473*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
8474of a string. You call it as follows:
8475
8476 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
8477
8478This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
8479STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
8480This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
8481Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
8482it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
8483
8484*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
8485if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
8486
8487*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
8488if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
8489
8490*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
8491to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
8492not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
8493which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
8494
8495(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
8496
8497This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
8498
8499The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
8500If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
8501are not included in the resulting value.
8502
8503The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
8504at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
8505WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
8506is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
8507
8508If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
8509place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
8510character extends across that column), then the padding character
8511PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
8512string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
8513column START-COLUMN.
8514
8515*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
8516the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
8517necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
8518difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
8519changed text, before the change.
8520
8521*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
8522sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
8523one character set for each script, not for each language.
8524
8525**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
8526
8527**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
8528
8529**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
8530set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
8531
8532**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
8533name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
8534which identify the character within that character set.
8535
8536**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
8537byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
8538opposite of split-char.
8539
8540**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
8541of all the characters between BEG and END.
8542
8543**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
8544of all the characters in a string.
8545
8546*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
8547and specifying coding systems.
8548
8549**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
8550system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
8551of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
8552(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
8553and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
8554as what to do about code conversion.)
8555
8556**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
8557name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
8558
8559**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8560for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8561except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
8562
8563Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8564which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
8565to match against a file name.
8566
8567VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8568a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8569decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8570to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8571systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8572specifies the coding system for encoding.
8573
8574If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8575or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8576
8577**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
8578the coding system to use for network sockets.
8579
8580Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
8581which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
8582either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
8583service names.
8584
8585VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
8586a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
8587decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
8588to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
8589systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
8590specifies the coding system for encoding.
8591
8592If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
8593or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
8594
8595**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
8596for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
8597except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
8598start the subprocess.
8599
8600**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
8601systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
8602when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
8603(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
8604to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
8605
8606**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
8607coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
8608subprocess.
8609
8610It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
8611but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
8612start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
8613connection permanently or until overridden.
8614
8615The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
8616file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
8617network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
8618coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
8619It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
8620system for one operation at a time.
8621
8622**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
8623files, subprocesses or network connections.
8624
8625**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
8626coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
8627The value is a cons cell,
8628 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
8629where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
8630the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
8631input to the subprocess.
8632
8633**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
8634change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
8635
8636** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
8637customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
8638you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
8639
8640You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
8641variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
8642information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
8643legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
8644customization.
8645
8646Thus, instead of writing
8647
8648 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
8649 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
8650
8651you would now write this:
8652
8653 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
8654 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
8655 :type 'boolean
8656 :group foo)
8657
8658The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
8659two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
8660describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
8661for a description of them.
8662
8663The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
8664should belong to. You define a new group like this:
8665
8666 (defgroup ispell nil
8667 "Spell checking using Ispell."
8668 :group 'processes)
8669
8670The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
8671group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
8672but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
8673to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
8674second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
8675
8676Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
8677package should have just one group; a more complex package should
8678have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
8679package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
8680first-level subgroups.
8681
8682** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
8683
8684This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
8685separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
8686
8687** easy-mmode
8688
8689The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
8690developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
8691only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
8692predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
8693`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
8694`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
8695
8696** Text property changes
8697
8698*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
8699text property.
8700
8701*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
8702previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
8703place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
8704functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
8705starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
8706
8707If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
8708LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
8709of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
8710position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
8711
8712*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
8713value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
8714is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
8715
8716** Changes in invisibility features
8717
8718*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
8719hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
8720is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
8721should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
8722would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
8723make the overlay visible.
8724
8725During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
8726invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
8727needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
8728which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
8729the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
8730t when it should hide it.
8731
8732*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
8733
8734Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
8735invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
8736and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
8737Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
8738manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
8739Here is an example of how to do this:
8740
8741 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
8742 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8743 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
8744 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8745
8746 ...
8747 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
8748
8749 ...
8750 ;; When done with the overlays:
8751 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
8752 ;; Or respectively:
8753 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
8754
8755** Changes in syntax parsing.
8756
8757*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
8758`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
8759obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
8760`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
8761
8762If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
8763is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
8764used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
8765
8766When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
8767character in the buffer is calculated thus:
8768
8769 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
8770 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
8771
8772 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
8773 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
8774 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
8775
8776 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
8777 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
8778 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
8779 determine the syntax type of the character.
8780
8781 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
8782 of the current buffer.
8783
8784*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
8785value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
8786for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
8787
8788*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
8789and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
8790only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
8791character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
8792another character with the same code (unless quoted).
8793
8794These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
8795text property.
8796
8797*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
8798arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
8799of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
8800
8801*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
8802(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
8803element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
8804nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
8805string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
8806
8807*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
8808syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
8809`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
8810
8811** Changes in face features
8812
8813*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
8814if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
8815
8816*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
8817of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
8818
8819*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
8820set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
8821
8822*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
8823set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
8824
8825*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
8826by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
8827and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
8828the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
8829overlay property).
8830
8831This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
8832arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
8833
8834** Changes in file-handling functions
8835
8836*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
8837directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
8838they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
8839is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
8840
8841This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
8842begins with ~.
8843
8844*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
8845it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
8846
8847*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
8848the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
8849
8850*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
8851as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
8852
8853*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
8854character code conversion as well as other things.
8855
8856Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
8857(formerly it did not).
8858
8859*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
8860environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
8861
8862*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
8863instead of constant strings.
8864
8865*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
8866to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
8867any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
8868
8869substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
8870in the same way as before.
8871
8872*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
8873The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
8874which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
8875
8876*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
8877error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
8878else, and returns nil.
8879
8880*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
8881directory cannot be listed.
8882
8883** Changes in minibuffer input
8884
8885*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
8886read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
8887additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
8888argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
8889ways:
8890
8891 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
8892 It is available through the history command M-n.
8893
8894*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
8895read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
8896argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
8897minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
8898enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
8899
8900In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
8901argument in this way.
8902
8903*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
8904from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
8905minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
8906
8907** Echo area features
8908
8909*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
8910echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
8911minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
8912after the echo area is cleared.
8913
8914*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
8915in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
8916
8917** Keyboard input features
8918
8919*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
8920set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
8921
8922*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
8923received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
8924by keyboard macros.
8925
8926** Frame-related changes
8927
8928*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
8929creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
8930hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
8931
8932*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
8933the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
8934has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
8935
8936*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
8937selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
8938value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
8939in the selected frame.
8940
8941*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
8942is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
8943which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
8944
8945** X Windows features
8946
8947*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
8948x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
8949x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
8950
8951*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
8952The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
8953
8954*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
8955MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
8956A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
8957
8958If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
8959it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
8960
8961** Subprocess features
8962
8963*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
8964functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
8965automatically.
8966
8967*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
8968and returns the output from the command as a string.
8969
8970*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
8971and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
8972
8973** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
8974does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
8975
8976** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
8977at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
8978goes after the other menu items.
8979
8980** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
8981of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
8982around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
8983are in use.
8984
8985The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
8986series of several changes--if that seems safe.
8987
8988Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
8989after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
8990form.
8991
8992** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
8993is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
8994but its hook is still run.
8995
8996** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
8997for errors that are handled by condition-case.
8998
8999If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
9000regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
9001useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
9002
9003This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
9004are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
9005filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
9006warned.
9007
9008** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
9009way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
9010
9011** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
9012integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
9013functions like display-time.
9014
9015** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
9016name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
9017
9018** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
9019can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
9020is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
9021
9022** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
9023if there is an error in compilation.
9024
9025** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
9026switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
9027argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
9028they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
9029
9030** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
9031Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
9032the *scratch* buffer.
9033
9034** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
9035The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
9036where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
9037e.g., in Font Lock mode.
9038
9039** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
9040and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
9041It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
9042
9043** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
9044using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
9045variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
9046and compose-mail-other-frame.
9047
9048** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
9049can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
9050full name of the specified user will be returned.
9051
9052** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
9053of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
9054where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
9055in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
9056option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
9057files at all.
9058
9059** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
9060and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
9061width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
9062the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
9063
9064For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
9065minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
9066with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
9067is how %S normally pads to two positions.
9068
9069** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
9070
9071** imenu.el changes.
9072
9073You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
9074item from menu created by imenu.
9075
9076An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
9077#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
9078select one of those items.
05197f40 9079\f
3787e12e 9080* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
9081
9082----------------------------------------------------------------------
9083Copyright information:
9084
75d80cc6 9085Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
9086
9087 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
9088 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
9089 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
9090 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
9091
9092 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
9093 of this document, or of portions of it,
9094 under the above conditions, provided also that they
9095 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
05197f40 9096\f
a933dad1
DL
9097Local variables:
9098mode: outline
9099paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
9100end: